Sony Handycam DCR TRV950 User Manual

3-075-494-13 (1)

Dig it a l

Vid e o Ca m e ra

Re co rd e r

Operating Instructions

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,

and retain it for future reference.

Owner’s Record

The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the

serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers

whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.

Model No. DCR-TRV

Model No. AC-

Serial No.

SERIES

DCR-TRV950

DCR-TRV940/TRV950

We lco m e !

Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. With your Handycam, you can

capture life’s precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Handycam is

loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be

producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.

Fo r cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.

a n d CANADA

WARNING

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do

not expose the unit to rain or

moisture.

CAUTION

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,

FULLY INSERT.

RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES

Lithium-Ion batteries are

recyclable.

You can help preserve our

environment by returning

your used rechargeable

batteries to the collection and

recycling location nearest you.

For more information regarding recycling of

rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-

8837, or visit http://www.rbrc.org/.

This symbol is intended to

alert the user to the presence

of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of

sufficient magnitude to

constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking

Lithium-Ion batteries.

DCR-TRV950 o n ly

Countries and areas where you can use

network functions are restricted.

For details, refer to the separate Network

Operating Instructions.

This symbol is intended to

alert the user to the presence

of important operating and

maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

Fo r cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.

If you have any questions about this product,

you may call:

Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-

SONY (7669)

The number below is for the FCC related

matters only.

CAUTION

The use of optical instruments with this

product will increase eye hazard. As the laser

beam used in this Handycam is harmful to

eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the

cabinet.

Regulatory Information

De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y

Trade Name:

Model No.:

SONY

DCR-TRV950

Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.

Refer to servicing to qualified personnel only.

Address:

680 Kinderkamack

Road, Oradell,

NJ07649 U.S.A.

201-930-6972

NOTICE

If static electricity or electromagnetism causes

data transfer to discontinue midway (fail),

restart the application or disconnect and

connect the USB cable again.

Telephone No.:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2)this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

“ Me m o ry St ick”

Fo r cu st o m e rs in CANADA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

“ Me m o ry St ick”

This Class B digital apparatus complies with

Canadian ICES-003.

DCR-TRV950 o n ly

The term “IC:” before the radio certification

number only signifies that Industry Canada

technical specifications were met.

CAUTION

You are cautioned that any changes or

modifications not expressly approved in this

manual could void your authority to operate

this equipment.

DCR-TRV950 o n ly

IMPORTANT NOTE

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance

requirements, the following antenna

installation and device operating

configurations must be satisfied: the antenna

has been installed by the manufacturer and no

changes can be made.

Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user

is encouraged to try to correct the interference

by one or more of the following measures:

—

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

—

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

—

Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

The supplied interface cable must be used with

the equipment in order to comply with the

limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart

B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Ma in Fe a t u re s

•Recording moving pictures on a

tape (p. 26)

•Recording still images on a tape

(p. 51)

Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s

o r st ill im a g e s, a n d p la yin g

t h e m b a ck

•Playing back a tape (p. 39)

•Recording still images on a

“Memory Stick” (p. 46, 135)

•Recording moving pictures on a

“Memory Stick” (p. 153)

•Viewing still images recorded on a

“Memory Stick” (p. 165)

•Viewing moving pictures on a

“Memory Stick” (p. 168)

•Viewing images recorded on a

“Memory Stick” using the USB cable

(p. 199, 203)

Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n yo u r

co m p u t e r

•Viewing moving pictures recorded on

tapes using the USB cable (p. 194)

•Capturing images on your computer

from your camcorder using the USB

cable (p. 196)

•Converting an analog signal to

digital to capture images onto your

computer (p. 204)

Ma in Fe a t u re s

Acce ssin g t h e In t e rn e t via a

Blu e t o o t h co m p lia n t d e vice

(DCR-TRV950 o n ly)

Accessing the Internet, sending/

receiving your e-mail. For details,

refer to the Network Function

Operating Instructions supplied

with your camcorder. (DCR-

TRV950 only) (p. 205)

Ot h e r u se s

Functions for adjusting the exposure in the recording mode

• BACK LIGHT (p. 34)

• SPOT LIGHT (p. 35)

• Recording images with the flash (p. 48, 139)

• PROGRAM AE (p. 67)

• Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 74)

• Flexible Spot Meter (p. 75)

Functions for giving images more impact

• Digital zoom (p. 31)

The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 12×, select the digital zoom power in

D ZOOM in the menu settings.)

• Fader (p. 55)

• Picture effect (p. 58)

• Digital effect (p. 59)

• Titles (p. 119)

• MEMORY MIX (p. 148)

Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings

• Sports lesson (p. 67)

• Landscape (p. 67)

• Manual focus (p. 76)

• Spot Focus (p. 78)

Functions for use w ith recorded tapes

• END SEARCH/ EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review (p. 37)

• DATA CODE (p. 41)

• Tape PB ZOOM (p. 86)

• ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 88)

• TITLE SEARCH (p. 89)

• Digital program editing (p. 98, 160)

Ta b le o f co n t e n t s

Shooting with the zebra pattern ......... 65

Using the color bar................................ 66

Shooting with manual adjustment ..... 67

Using the PROGRAM AE ............. 67

Adjusting the shutter speed .......... 70

Adjusting the white balance ......... 72

Adjusting the exposure ................. 74

Using the spot light-metering

Ma in Fe a t u re s ....................................... 4

Qu ick St a rt Gu id e

– Recording on a tape ............................ 8

– Recording on a “Memory Stick” ..... 10

Ge t t in g St a rt e d

Using this manual ................................. 12

Checking supplied accessories............ 14

Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 15

Installing the battery pack............. 15

Charging the battery pack............. 16

Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 19

Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 20

Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 23

Step 4 Using the touch panel .............. 24

– Flexible Spot Meter ............... 75

Focusing manually................................ 76

Using the spot focus – Spot Focus ...... 78

Adjusting recording level manually

– Sound recording level ................. 79

Interval recording ................................. 81

Frame by frame recording

– Frame recording .......................... 83

Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck

Op e ra t io n s

Re co rd in g – Ba sics

Recording a picture............................... 26

Shooting backlit subjects

– BACK LIGHT ........................ 34

Shooting subjects lit by strong light

– SPOT LIGHT ......................... 35

Self-timer recording ....................... 36

Checking recordings

Playing back tapes with picture

effect ................................................. 84

Playing back tapes with digital

effect ................................................. 85

Enlarging images recorded on tapes

– Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 86

Quickly locating a scene

– ZERO SET MEMORY ................. 88

Searching the boundaries of a recorded

tape by title – TITLE SEARCH ..... 89

Searching a recording by date

– DATE SEARCH ........................... 90

Searching for a photo – PHOTO

SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN ............. 92

– END SEARCH /

EDITSEARCH / Rec Review ........ 37

Pla yb a ck – Ba sics

Playing back a tape ............................... 39

To display the screen indicators

– Display function ................... 41

Viewing the recording on TV .............. 45

Ed it in g

Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g

Op e ra t io n s

Dubbing a tape ...................................... 95

Dubbing only desired scenes

Recording still images on a “Memory

Stick” during tape recording ........ 46

Recording still images on a tape

– Tape Photo recording ................. 51

Using the wide mode ........................... 53

Using the fader ...................................... 55

Using special effects

– Digital program editing

(on tapes) ......................................... 98

Recording video or TV programs ..... 109

Inserting a scene from a VCR

– Insert Editing ............................. 113

Audio dubbing .................................... 115

Superimposing a title ......................... 119

Making your own titles ...................... 122

Labeling a cassette .............................. 124

– Picture effect................................. 58

Using special effects

– Digital effect ................................. 59

Presetting the adjustment for picture

quality

– Custom preset .............................. 62

Using the guide frame .......................... 64

Ta b le o f co n t e n t s

Viewing images recorded on a

“ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s

“Memory Stick” on your computer

– For Windows users ................... 199

Connecting your camcorder to your

computer using the USB cable

– For Macintosh users .................. 201

Viewing images recorded on a

“Memory Stick” on your computer

– For Macintosh users .................. 203

Capturing images from an analog video

unit on your computer

Using a “Memory Stick”

– Introduction ............................... 126

Recording still images on a “Memory

Stick”

– Memory Photo recording ......... 135

Recording images from a tape as still

images ............................................ 144

Superimposing a still image in the

“Memory Stick” on an image

– MEMORY MIX .......................... 148

Recording moving pictures on

a“Memory Stick”

– MPEG movie recording ............ 153

Recording pictures from a tape as a

moving picture ............................. 156

Recording edited pictures from a tape as

a moving picture

– Signal convert function............. 204

Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n

(DCR-TRV950 o n ly)

Accessing the network ....................... 205

For the details, refer to the Network

Function Operating Instructions

supplied with your camcorder.

– Digital program editing

(on a “Memory Stick”) ................. 160

Copying still images from a tape

– PHOTO SAVE ............................ 163

Viewing still images

Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r

Changing the default settings with the

menu............................................... 207

– Memory photo playback .......... 165

Viewing moving pictures

– MPEG movie playback ............. 168

Copying images recorded on a

“Memory Stick” to a tape ............ 171

Enlarging still images recorded on a

“Memory Stick”

– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 173

Playing back images in a continuous

loop – SLIDE SHOW .................... 175

Preventing accidental erasure

– Image protection........................ 176

Deleting images – DELETE ............... 177

Writing a print mark

Tro u b le sh o o t in g

Types of trouble and how to correct

trouble ............................................ 218

Self-diagnosis display......................... 225

Warning indicators and messages .... 226

Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n

Usable cassettes ................................... 228

About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery

pack ................................................ 231

About i.LINK ....................................... 233

Using your camcorder abroad .......... 235

Maintenance information and

precautions .................................... 236

Specifications ....................................... 242

– PRINT MARK ............................ 180

Using the optional printer ................. 181

Qu ick Re fe re n ce

Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g yo u r

Co m p u t e r

Identifying parts and controls........... 244

Index ..................................................... 254

Viewing images on your computer

– Introduction ............................... 183

Connecting your camcorder to your

computer using the USB cable

– For Windows users ................... 186

Viewing images recorded on a tape on

your computer

– For Windows users ................... 194

Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a t a p e

This chapter introduces you to the basic features to recorded

pictures on tapes of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses

“( )” for more information.

Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 19)

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).

Open the DC

IN jack cover.

AC power adaptor (supplied)

Connect the plug with its v

mark facing up.

In se rt in g a ca sse t t e (p . 23)

3 Close the cassette

2 Insert the cassette

straight as far as

1 Slide OPEN/Z

EJECT in the

compartment by

pressing

on the

possible into the

direction of the

arrow to open the

lid.

cassette compartment.

After the cassette

compartment goes

down completely,

close the lid until it

clicks.

cassette compartment

with the window

facing out and the

write-protect tab

facing upward.

Write-protect tab

Re co rd in g a p ict u re (p . 26)

1Remove the lens cap.

POWER

2Set the POWER

switch to CAMERA

while pressing the

small green button.

MEMORY/

NETWORK

POWER

4Press START/ STOP.

Your camcorder

starts recording. To

stop recording, press

START/ STOP again.

MEMORY/

NETWORK

3Press OPEN to open

the LCD panel.

The picture appears

on the screen.

View finder

When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder with your eye

against the eyecup.

Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 30).

When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record

the date and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).

Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD

scre e n (p . 39)

POWER

1Set the POWER switch

2Press m to rewind the tape.

to VCR while pressing

the small green button.

REW

MEMORY/

NETWORK

3Press N to start playback.

PLAY

NOTE

Do not pick up your

camcorder by holding the

viewfinder, the flash, the LCD

panel or the battery pack.

Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a

“Memory Stick” of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses

“( )” for more information.

Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 19)

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).

Open the DC IN

jack cover.

AC power adaptor (supplied)

Connect the plug with its v

mark facing up.

In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 128)

1 Slide MEMORY

OPEN in the

2 Insert a “Memory

Stick” in the

direction of the arrow

to open the “Memory

Stick” slot.

“Memory Stick” slot

as far as it can go

with the B mark

facing up as

illustrated.

MEMORY EJECT

Press the MEMORY

EJECT once lightly to

eject it.

“Memory Stick” slot

Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 135)

3Press OPEN to open

1Remove the lens cap.

the LCD panel.

The picture appears on

the screen.

POWER

2Set the POWER switch to

MEMORY/ NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only)

while pressing the small

green button.

MEMORY/

NETWORK

5Press PHOTO

deeper.

4Press PHOTO

lightly.

The image while

pressing the

button deeply is

recorded on the

“Memory Stick.”

You can start

recording when the

small green button

on the screen stops

flashing, and lights

up.

View finder

When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder with your eye

against the eyecup.

Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 30).

When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record

the date and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).

Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e s o n t h e LCD

scre e n (p . 165)

1Set the POWER switch to

POWER

MEMORY/ NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only)

or VCR while pressing the

small green button.

MEMORY/

NETWORK

2Press PLAY or

PB. The last recorded

image is displayed.

PLAY

NOTE

Do not pick up your

camcorder by holding the

viewfinder, the flash, the LCD

panel or the battery pack.

— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —

Usin g t h is m a n u a l

The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before

you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number

by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV950 is the model used for

illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any

differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCR-TRV950

only”.

As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in

capital letters.

e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is

being carried out.

Types of differences

DCR-

TRV940

MEMORY

—

TRV950

MEMORY/NETWORK

Mark on the POWER switch

Network function

Provided

—

Not provided

No t e o n Ca sse t t e Me m o ry

Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes with

your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory

Functions that require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has a

cassette memory are:

– END SEARCH (p. 37)

– DATE SEARCH (p. 90)

– PHOTO SEARCH (p. 92)

Functions you can operate only with the cassette memory are:

– TITLE SEARCH (p. 89)

– Superimposing a title (p. 119)

– Labeling a cassette (p. 124)

For details of cassette types, see page 228.

You see this mark in the introduction of features that are operated only with

cassette memory.

Cassettes with cassette memory are marked by

(Cassette Memory).

Usin g t h is m a n u a l

No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s

TV color systems differ depending on the country or region. To view your recordings

on a TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV.

Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s

Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.

Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the copyright laws.

Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re

Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r (o n m o u n t e d m o d e ls o n ly)

•The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision

technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.

How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,

blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.

These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the

recording in any w ay.

•Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea

water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.

Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].

•Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a

car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].

•Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD

screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause

malfunctions [c].

•Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.

Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].

[a ]

[b ]

[c]

[d ]

Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.

1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC pow er

7 Lens cap (1) (p. 26)

adaptor (1), pow er cord (1) (p. 16)

2 NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (p. 15, 16)

3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 45)

8 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 126)

9 USB cable (1) (p. 183)

0 CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1)

4 Wireless Remote Commander (1)

(p. 188)

(p. 250)

qa Cleaning cloth (1) (p. 237)

5 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote

qs Stylus (1) (DCR-TRV950 only) (p. 206)

Commander (2) (p. 251)

6 Shoulder strap (1)

Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a

malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.

St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly

In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

(1) Lift up the viewfinder.

(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.

To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

(1) Lift up the viewfinder.

(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT

down.

BATT release

button

If you use the large capacity battery pack

If you install the NP-FM70/QM71/FM90/FM91/QM91 battery pack on your camcorder,

extend its viewfinder.

St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly

Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.

Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series).

See page 231 for details of “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with

your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing up.

(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.

(3) Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.

(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery

time is indicated in minutes on the display window.

When the remaining battery indicator changes to

, normal charge is completed. To

fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour

after normal charge is completed until FULL appears in the display window. Fully

charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.

POWER

MEMORY/

NETWORK

Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly

Note

Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of

the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power

adaptor.

Remaining battery time indicator

The remaining battery time indicator in the display window indicates the approximate

recording time with the viewfinder.

Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time

“---- min” appears in the display window.

When you use the AC pow er adaptor

Place the AC power adaptor near a wall outlet. If any trouble occurs with this unit,

disconnect the plug from a wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.

Ch a rg in g t im e

Battery pack

NP-FM50 (supplied)

NP-FM70

Full charge (Normal charge)

150 (90)

240 (180)

NP-QM71

260 (200)

NP-FM90

330 (270)

NP-FM91/QM91

360 (300)

Approximate minutes at 25°C (77°F) to charge an empty battery pack

The charging time may increase if the battery’s temperature is extremely high or low

because of the ambient temperature.

Re co rd in g t im e

Recording w ith

the view finder

Recording w ith

the LCD screen

Battery pack

Continuous

Typical*

Continuous

Typical*

NP-FM50 (supplied)

NP-FM70

175

200

310

360

100

135

155

240

280

NP-QM71

115

NP-FM90

175

140

160

NP-FM91/QM91

205

Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery

* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/

stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter.

St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly

Pla yin g t im e

Playing time

w ith LCD closed

Playing time

on LCD screen

Battery pack

NP-FM50 (supplied)

NP-FM70

180

310

350

550

635

115

205

235

365

425

NP-QM71

NP-FM90

NP-FM91/QM91

Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery

Note

Approximate recording time and playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery life will be

shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.

If the pow er goes off although remaining battery time indicator indicates that the

battery pack has enough pow er to operate

Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining

indicator is correct.

Recommended charging temperature

We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C

to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).

What is ”InfoLITHIUM”?

The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as

battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible

with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with

the “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” M series battery packs have the

mark.

SERIES

“InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly

Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t

When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a

wall outlet using the AC power adaptor.

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover. Connect the AC power adaptor supplied with

your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plug’s v mark

facing up.

(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.

(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.

2,3

PRECAUTION

The set is not disconnected from the AC power supply (house current) as long as it is

connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.

Notes

•The AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your

camcorder.

•The DC IN jack has “source priority.” This means that the battery pack cannot supply

any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power

cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.

Using a car battery

Use Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional).

Refer to the operating instructions of the Car Battery Adaptor for further information.

St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e

Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. “CLOCK SET”

will be displayed each time that you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/

NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) unless you set the date and time settings.

If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time may be

cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable battery

installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 239).

Set the area, the daylight saving time, year, month, day, hour and then the minute, in

that order.

(1) Press MENU to display the menu settings while the POWER switch is set to

CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

, then press the dial.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired area (where you are), then

press the dial.

(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select whether or not the time is daylight

saving time, then press the dial.

Select OFF if the time is not daylight saving time. Select ON if it is.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired year, then press the dial.

The year changes as follows:

1995 T · · · · t 2002 T · · · · t 2079

(7) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and

pressing the dial.

(8) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by

the time signal. The clock starts to move.

(9) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.

St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e

SETUP MENU

CLOCK SET

USB STREAM

LTR SIZE

LANGUAGE

DEMO MODE

SETUP MENU

CLOCK SET

USB STREAM

LTR SIZE

LANGUAGE

DEMO MODE

RETURN

STBY

– –:– –:– –

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

SETUP MENU

CLOCK SET

USB STREAM

LTR SIZE

LANGUAGE

DEMO MODE

RETURN

STBY

– –:– –:– –

CLOCK SET

AREA

GMT +0.0

Lisbon, London

DST OFF

DATE

– – – – – – – – – – – : – –

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

EXEC NEXT ITEM

CLOCK SET

AREA26

CLOCK SET

AREA26

GMT –5.0

NewYork, Bogota

DST OFF

DATE

DST OFF

DATE

– – – – – – – – – – – : – –

[

] :

[

] :

EXEC NEXT ITEM

CLOCK SET

AREA26

GMT –5.0

NewYork, Bogota

DST OFF

DATE

2002 JAN

12 00AM

2002 JAN

12 00AM

[

] :

EXEC NEXT ITEM

[

] :

EXEC NEXT ITEM

CLOCK SET

AREA26

SETUP MENU

STBY

2002

GMT –5.0

JUL

CLOCK SET

USB STREAM

LTR SIZE

NewYork, Bogota

5:30:00 PM

DST OFF

LANGUAGE

DEMO MODE

RETURN

DATE

2002 JUL

30PM

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

EXEC END

Note

Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.

If you do not set the date and time

“--:--:--” and “--- -- ----” are recorded on the data code of the tape and the “Memory

Stick.”

When using your camcorder abroad

Set the clock to the local time (p. 22).

If you use the camcorder in a region w here daylight saving time is used

Set DST SET to ON in the menu setting.

Note on the time indicator

The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.

•12:00 AM stands for midnight.

•12:00 PM stands for noon.

St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e

Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y a t im e d iffe re n ce

You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select AREA

SET, DST SET* in the menu settings. See page 216 for more information.

* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.

Wo rld t im e d iffe re n ce s

1920 21 22 23 2425 26 272930 31 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 121314 16 17 18

AREA Time

difference

Area or country

AREA Time

difference

Area or country

GMT

Lisbon, London

Berlin, Paris

+11:00

Solomon Is

+01:00

+02:00

+03:00

+03:30

+04:00

+04:30

+05:00

+05:30

+06:00

+06:30

+07:00

+08:00

+09:00

+09:30

+10:00

+12:00

–12:00

–11:00

–10:00

–09:00

–08:00

–07:00

–06:00

–05:00

–04:00

–03:30

–03:00

–02:00

–01:00

Fiji, Wellington

Eniwetok, Kwajalein

Midway Is., Samoa

Hawaii

Helsinki, Cairo

Moscow, Nairobi

Tehran

Abu Dhabi, Baku

Kabul

Alaska

LosAngeles, Tijuana

Denver, Arizona

Chicago, MexicoCity

New York, Bogota

Santiago

Karachi, Islamabad

Calcutta, New Delhi

Almaty, Dhaka

Rangoon

Bangkok, Jakarta

Hongkong, Singapore

Seoul, Tokyo

St. John’s

Brasilia, Montevideo

Fernando de Noronha

Azores

Adelaide, Darwin

Melbourne, Sydney

To adjust a time difference

Select AREA SET in the menu setting, and select an area or a country you want to adjust

to, then press SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e

(1) Prepare the power supply.

(2) Slide OPEN/Z EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.

The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.

(3) Insert the cassette straight as far as possible into the cassette compartment with

the window facing out and the write-protect tab facing upward.

(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing

on the cassette compartment.

The cassette compartment automatically goes down.

(5) After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it

clicks.

OPEN/Z EJECT

4, 5

To e je ct a ca sse t t e

Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.

Notes

•Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a

malfunction.

•The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette

compartment other than the

mark.

When you use a cassette w ith cassette memory

Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 228).

To prevent accidental erasure

Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.

St e p 4 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l

Your camcorder has operation buttons on the LCD screen. Touch the LCD screen

directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV950 only) to operate each

function. This section describes how to operate the touch panel during recording or

playing back images on a tape.

(1) Prepare the power supply (p. 15 to 19).

(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.

(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR while pressing the small green

button.

(4) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.

(5) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.

(6) Press a desired operation item. Refer to relevant pages of this manual for each

function.

5,6

When the POWER switch

is set to CAMERA

POWER

PAGE1 PAGE2

EXIT

MEMORY/

NETWORK

END

SCH

SPOT DIG

FOCUS EFFT

MEM

M I X METER

SPOT

PAGE1 PAGE2

EXIT

LCD

BRT

SELF

TIMER

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To e xe cu t e se t t in g s

Press

OK. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2.

To ca n ce l se t t in g s

Press

OFF to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2.

St e p 4 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l

Notes

•When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the

LCD panel from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index

finger.

•Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the supplied

stylus. (DCR-TRV950 only)

•Do not press the LCD screen too hard.

•Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.

•If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You

can control the display with DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder.

•When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is

required (CALIBRATION) (p. 238).

•When the LCD screen gets dirty, clean it with the supplied cleaning cloth.

When executing each item

The green bar appears above the item.

If the items are not available

The color of the items changes to gray.

Press FN to display the follow ing buttons:

When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA

PAGE1

PAGE2

END SCH, SPOT FOCUS, DIG EFFT, MEM MIX, SPOT METER

LCD BRT, SELFTIMER

When the POWER switch is set to VCR

PAGE1

PAGE2

LCD BRT,

PB ZOOM,

PB, INDEX, END SCH

PB, INDEX, DIG EFFT

See page 129 when the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950

only).

— Re co rd in g – Ba sics —

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.

(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs on its sides and pull the lens cap

string to fix it.

(2) Prepare the power supply and insert a cassette. See “Step 1” to “Step 3” for

more information (p. 15 to 23).

(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.

This sets your camcorder to the standby.

(4) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The viewfinder automatically turns off.

(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator

appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder

lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.

LOCK sw itch

(

CHG

)

CMERA

Microphone

Camera recording

lamp

POWER

REC 0:00:01

40min

MEMORY/

NETWORK

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Notes

•Fasten the grip strap firmly.

•The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed

while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the

recording data, press the DATA CODE button during playback you can also use the

Remote Commander for this operation (p. 41).

Note on recording

Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP

(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 214). In the LP mode, you can

record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.

When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing

back the tape on your camcorder.

Note on the LOCK sw itch

When you slide the LOCK switch in the direction of the arrow, the POWER switch can

no longer be set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) accidentally. The LOCK

switch is set to the further side (unlock position) as the default setting.

To enable smooth transition

Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as

you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.

However, check the following:

– Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.

– When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

– When you use a cassette with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition

smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the END SEARCH (p. 37).

If you leave your camcorder in the standby for five minutes w hile the cassette is

inserted

Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent

battery and tape wear. To return to the standby, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)

and then back to CAMERA. To start recording, press the START/STOP button again

without switching the POWER switch. However, your camcorder does not turn off

automatically while the cassette is not inserted.

When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record in the LP

mode

•The transition between scenes may not be smooth.

•The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly

between scenes.

The battery use time w hen you record using the LCD screen

The battery time is slightly shorter than the shooting time using the viewfinder.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Aft e r re co rd in g

(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

(2) Close the LCD panel.

(3) Eject the cassette.

(4) Remove the battery pack.

Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n

The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees.

The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to

the lens side.

180°ꢀ

90°ꢀ

When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically, and swing it into the camcorder body.

Note

When the LCD panel is opened, the viewfinder automatically turns off and no image is

displayed in the viewfinder. However, in the Mirror Mode, images are displayed in the

viewfinder as well (p. 32).

LCD screen

•When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight, the LCD screen may be

difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.

•When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up

to 90 degrees.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n

(1) Press FN and select PAGE2 while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or

MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN to display PAGE1.

(2) Press LCD BRT. The screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen appears.

(3) Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen using –/+.

– : to dim

+ : to brighten

(4) Press

OK to return to PAGE1/PAGE2.

2,3

LCD

BRT

LCD BRT

–

the bar indicator

OPEN

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

LCD screen backlight

You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings

when using the battery pack (p. 210).

Even if you adjust LCD BRT

The recorded picture will not be affected.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r

If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.

Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the images in the viewfinder come

into sharp focus.

Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.

The view finder lens

adjustment lever

View finder backlight

You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in the menu settings

when using the battery pack (p. 210).

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re

Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.

Using the zoom sparingly results in better-looking recordings.

W : Wide-angle (subject appears farther away)

T : Telephoto (subject appears closer)

To use zoom greater than 12×

Zoom greater than 12× is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 24× or 150×.

To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu

settings (p. 209). The digital zoom is set to OFF as a default setting.

The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming

zone.

The digital zooming zone appears when you select

the digital zoom power in the menu settings.

When you shoot close to a subject

If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the “W” side until the

focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch)

away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch)

away in the wide-angle position.

Note on digital zoom

The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the “T”

side.

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

You cannot use the digital zoom.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Sh o o t in g w it h t h e Mirro r Mo d e

This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen.

The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while

you look at the subject in the viewfinder.

Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

Rotate the LCD screen 180 degrees.

The

indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen.

Xz appears in the standby, and z appears in the recording while the POWER switch

is set to CAMERA. Some of other indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not

displayed.

Picture in the mirror mode

The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal

when recorded.

During recording in the mirror mode

•ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work.

•FN appears mirror-reversed in the viewfinder.

When you press FN

The

does not appear on the screen.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d in t h e re co rd in g

Indicators are not recorded on tapes.

Remaining battery time

Cassette memory

This appears when using a cassette with cassette memory.

Recording mode

STBY/REC

REC 0:00:01

45min

50min

Time code/Tape counter

Remaining tape

This appears after you insert a cassette and record or

play back for a while.

JUL

2002

12:05:56PM

FN button

Press this button to display operation buttons on the

LCD screen.

Time

The time is displayed about five seconds after the

power is turned on.

Date

The date is displayed about five seconds after the

power is turned on.

Remaining battery time indicator during recording

The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the continuous recording time.

The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are

recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute

for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.

Time code

The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes :

seconds) in CAMERA and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR.

You cannot rewrite only the time code.

Remaining tape indicator

The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.

Recording data

The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed

while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the

recording data, press the DATA CODE button during playback. You can also use the

Remote Commander for this operation (p. 41).

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Sh o o t in g b a cklit su b je ct s – BACK LIGHT

When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a

light background, use the backlight function.

Press BACK LIGHT while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/

NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

The . indicator appears on the screen. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.

BACK LIGHT

When shooting backlit subjects

If you press SPOT LIGHT, EXPOSURE or SPOT METER, the backlight function will be

canceled.

When you manually adjust the exposure

You cannot use the backlight function.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Sh o o t in g su b je ct s lit b y st ro n g lig h t – SPOT LIGHT

This function prevents people's faces, for example, from appearing excessively white

when shooting subjects lit by strong light, such as in the theater.

Press SPOT LIGHT while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/

NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

The

indicator appears on the screen. To cancel, press SPOT LIGHT again.

SPOT LIGHT

w hen shooting spotlighted subjects

If you press BACK LIGHT, EXPOSURE or SPOT METER, the spot light function will be

canceled.

When you manually adjust the exposure

You cannot use the spot light function.

Re co rd in g a p ict u re

Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g

Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the

Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2.

(2) Press SELFTIMER.

The

(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.

(3) Press START/STOP.

The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two

seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts

automatically.

START/STOP

To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n

Press START/STOP.

To restart the countdown, press START/STOP again.

To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r

Press SELFTIMER so that the

(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen

while your camcorder is in the standby.

Note

The self-timer is automatically canceled when:

– The self-timer recording is finished.

– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

You can also record still images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer (p. 143).

Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s

– END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Re c Re vie w

You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition

between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.

EDITSEARCH

END SEARCH

You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.

(1) In the standby, press FN to display PAGE1.

(2) Press END SCH.

The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your

camcorder returns to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker

or headphones.

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To st o p se a rch in g

Press END SCH again.

End search

When you use a cassette without cassette memory, the end search function does not

work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a

cassette with cassette memory, the end search works even once you eject the cassette.

If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions

The end search may not work correctly.

EDITSEARCH

You can search for the next recording start point.

Hold down the EDITSEARCH in the standby. The recorded portion is played back.

– 7 : To go backward

: To go forward

Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, recording begins

from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.

Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s – END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Re c Re vie w

Re c Re vie w

You can check the last recorded section.

Press the – 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in the standby.

The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and

then your camcorder will return to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the

speaker or headphones.

— Pla yb a ck – Ba sics —

Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e

You can monitor the playback picture on the screen. If you close the LCD panel, you

can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can control playback using the

Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.

(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the recorded tape.

(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.

(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.

(4) Press m to rewind the tape.

(5) Press N to start playback.

(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.

– : To turn down

+ : To turn up

When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted.

POWER

VOLUME

MEMORY/

NETWORK

REW

PLAY

To st o p p la yb a ck

Press x.

Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e

When monitoring on the LCD screen

You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the

LCD screen facing out.

If you leave the pow er on for a long time

Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.

When you open or close the LCD panel

Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically.

Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e

To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs – Disp la y fu n ct io n

Press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder or DISPLAY on the Remote

Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators disappear on the screen. To

make the indicators appear, press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL or DISPLAY again.

DISPLAY

DATA CODE

DISPLAY/

TOUCH PANEL

DATA CODE

Ab o u t d a t e /t im e a n d va rio u s se t t in g s

Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the

recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) (data code).

1 Set the POWER sw itch to VCR, then play back a tape.

2 Press DATA CODE on your camcorder or the Remote Commander.

The display changes as follows when you press the DATA CODE:

date/time t various settings (SteadyShot, exposure, white balance, gain, shutter

speed, aperture value) t no indicator

Date/time

Various settings

0:00:23:01

40min

0:00:23:01

50min

[a ]

[b ]

[c]

[d ]

AUTO

60 AWB

JUL

2002

[e ]

[f]

12:05:56 AM

F1.8

9dB

[g ]

[a ] Tape counter

[b ] SteadyShot OFF

[c] Exposure mode

[d ] White balance

[e ] Gain

[f] Shutter speed

[g ] Aperture value

Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e

To not display various settings

Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 216).

The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE :

date/time y no indicator

Various settings

Various settings are your camcorder’s information when you have recorded. In the

recording, the various settings will not be displayed.

When you use the data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if:

– A blank portion of the tape is being played back.

– The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.

– The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.

Data code

When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code appears on the TV screen.

Remaining battery time indicator during playback

The indicator indicates the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may

not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you

close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct

remaining battery time to be displayed.

Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e

Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s

To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.

To p la y b a ck p a u se (vie w in g a st ill p ict u re )

Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X.

To a d va n ce t h e t a p e

Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.

To re w in d t h e t a p e

Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.

To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n

Press

on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.

To resume normal playback, press N.

To lo ca t e a sce n e m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )

Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the

button.

To m o n it o r h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re s w h ile a d va n cin g o r re w in d in g

t h e t a p e (skip sca n )

Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume

rewinding or advancing, release the button.

To vie w t h e p ict u re a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)

Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. For slow playback in the reverse

direction, press

, then press y on the Remote Commander. To resume normal

playback, press N.

To vie w p ict u re s a t d o u b le sp e e d

Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the

reverse direction, press

, then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume

normal playback, press N.

To vie w p ict u re s fra m e -b y-fra m e

Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause. For frame-by-frame

playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.

To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)

Press FN, then press END SCH in the stop mode. The last five-second recorded portion

is played back and then stopped.

Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e

In the various playback modes

•Sound is muted.

•The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.

When the playback pause lasts for five minutes

Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N.

Slow playback

The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this

function does not work for an output signal through the DV Interface.

When you play back a tape in reverse

Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is

not a malfunction.

Vie w in g t h e re co rd in g o n TV

Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your

camcorder to watch playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video

control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the screen.

When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you power

your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor (p. 19). Refer to the

operating instructions of your TV.

Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable

supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.

AUDIO/VIDEO

White

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Yellow

S VIDEO

: Signal flow

AUDIO

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

Red

If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o a VCR

Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting

cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the

white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the

white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is R

(right) signal.

If your TV has an S video jack

Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With

this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V

connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your

camcorder and the TV.

This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

To display the screen indicators on TV

Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings (p. 217).

Then, press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder. To turn the screen

indicators off, press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder again.

— Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry

St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g

You can record still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording

standby. You can also record still images on a tape (p. 51).

Before operation

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

•Set PHOTO REC in

MEMORY).

to MEMORY in the menu settings (The default setting is

(1) In the standby, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. The

CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change from the

selected still image to another image, release PHOTO once and press it lightly

again.

(2) Press PHOTO deeper.

Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

The image while pressing the button deeply is recorded on the “Memory

Stick.”

[a][b]

SFN

1 / 6

CAPTURE

640

PHOTO

SFN

640

PHOTO

[a] : Number of the recorded images

[b] : Approximate number of the images that can be recorded on the “Memory Stick”

Notes

•When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. If you do so, the image

may flutter.

•You cannot record still images on a “Memory Stick” during following operations

( The

indicator flashes on the screen.):

– Wide mode

– Fader

– Picture effect

– Digital effect

– MEMORY MIX

“Memory Stick”

For details, see page 126 for more information.

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g

Image size of still images

Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.

When you want to record still images in different size, use the Memory Photo recording

(p. 135).

When the POWER sw itch is set to CAMERA

You cannot select image quality.

The image quality when you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only) is used. (The default setting is SUPER FINE).

During and after recording still images on a “Memory Stick”

Your camcorder continues recording on tape.

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press

the button.

To record still images on a “Memory Stick” during tape recording

You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when

you press PHOTO will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”

To record images w ith higher quality

We recommend that you use the Memory Photo recording (p. 135).

Title

The title cannot be recorded.

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g

Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh

The flash pops up automatically. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To change

the flash mode, press (flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator appears on the

screen.

(flash)

Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:

t (no indicator)

Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce red-eye.

Forced flash:

No flash:

The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness.

The flash does not fire.

The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change

FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 208). Try recording

various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.

Notes

•Attaching the lens hood or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the

flash or cause lens shadow to appear.

•You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.

•

(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on

individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-

recording flash or other conditions.

•A flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location.

•When recording with the flash, it takes longer to prepare for image capture. This is

because your camcorder starts to charge power for firing after the flash pops up.

Darken the surroundings by covering the lens, and press PHOTO lightly so that your

camcorder starts to charge power after the flash pops up.

•If it is not easy to focus on the subject automatically, for example, when recording in

the dark, use the focal distance information (p. 77) for focusing manually.

When the flashlight does not reach to the subject

The color of the image may change.

If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after removing the pow er

supply

Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g

You cannot shoot images w ith the flash during the follow ing operations:

– Tape Recording

– Shutter speed (1/30 or smaller) adjustment

The flash does not fire even if you select auto (no indicator) and

reduction) during the follow ing operations:

– Spot light

(auto red-eye

– Shutter speed adjustment

– Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE

– Landscape of PROGRAM AE

– Exposure

– Flexible Spot Meter

When you use an external flash (optional) w hich does not have the auto red-eye

reduction

You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction.

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g

Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g

You can record still images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. You can also use

the Remote Commander for this operation.

Before operation

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

•Set PHOTO REC in

MEMORY.)

to MEMORY in the menu settings.(The default setting is

(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2.

(2) Press SELFTIMER.

The

(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.

(3) Press PHOTO deeper.

The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two

seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then the recording starts

automatically.

PHOTO

To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r

Press SELFTIMER so that the

(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while

your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot stop the count down.

Note

The self-timer is automatically canceled when:

– The self-timer is finished.

– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

Self-timer recording

You can operate the self-timer recording only during the recording standby.

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e

– Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g

You can record still images such as photographs on tapes.

You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode

on a 60-minute tape.

(1) In the standby, set PHOTO REC in

to TAPE in the menu settings.

(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears.

The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet.

To change from the selected still image to another image, release PHOTO once

and press it lightly again.

(3) Press PHOTO deeper.

The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound

during those seven seconds is also recorded.

The still image is displayed on the screen until recording is completed.

CAPTURE

PHOTO

•••••••

PHOTO

Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh

For the details, see page 48.

Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h se lf-t im e r

(1) Set PHOTO REC in

to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 209).

(2) Follow steps 1 and 3 on page 50.

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e – Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g

Notes

•During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.

•When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. If you do so, the image

may flutter.

•You cannot use PHOTO during the following operations: ( The

indicator flashes

on the screen.)

– Fader

– Digital effect

•When you record images with the flash, sound may not be recorded clearly.

If you record a moving subject w ith the tape photo recording

When you play back the still image on other equipment, the image may flutter. This is

not a malfunction.

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press

the button.

To use the tape photo recording during the tape recording

You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO

deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds, and your camcorder

returns to the standby.

To record clear still images w ith little unsteadiness

We recommend that you record on a “Memory Stick” using the Memory Photo

recording.

When you record images w ith the flash

The allowed shooting distance is shorter than when you record on a “Memory Stick” in

Memory Photo recording.

When playing back images recorded w ith the flash on other equipment

These images may flicker.

Usin g t h e w id e m o d e

You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE). If

you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ID-2 system, the screen size is

automatically selected.

Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a ]. The picture

during playback on a normal TV [b ] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the

longwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode,

you can watch pictures of normal images [d ].

[b ]

[a ]

16:9WIDE

[c]

[d ]

(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

16:9WIDE in , then press the dial (p. 209).

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.

CAMERA SET

ZOOM

PHOTO REC

16:9WIDE

STEADYSHOT

FRAME REC

INT. REC

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e

Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

Usin g t h e w id e m o d e

In the w ide mode

You cannot select the following functions:

– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or recording

standby

– BOUNCE

– OLD MOVIE

During recording

You cannot select or cancel the wide mode. When you cancel the wide mode, set your

camcorder to the standby and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

Connection for a TV

Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full

size when:

– You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ID-2)

system.

– You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV.

ID-1 system

The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/vertical ratio) information (16:9,

4:3, or letter box) with video signals.

ID-2 system

The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between

video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using an A/V

connecting cable.

Usin g t h e fa d e r

You can fade in or out to give your recording a more professional appearance.

[a ]

STBY

REC

FADER

M. FADER

(mosaic)

BOUNCE^{1) 2)}

OVERLAP²⁾

WIPE²⁾

DOT²⁾

[b ]

STBY

REC

MONOTONE

When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.

When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.

¹⁾You can use the bounce when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu settings.

²⁾Fade in only.

Usin g t h e fa d e r

(1) When fading in [a ]

In the standby, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.

When fading out [b ]

In the recording, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.

The indicator changes as follows:

FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE

(no indicator)T

DOT

WIPE

OVERLAP

The last selected fader is indicated first of all.

(2) Press START/STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing.

After fade in/out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal

mode.

START/STOP

FADER

To ca n ce l t h e fa d e r

Before pressing START/STOP, press FADER until the indicator disappears.

Note

You cannot use the following functions while using the fader. Also, you cannot use the

fader while using the following functions:

– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or recording

standby

– Tape photo recording

– Digital effect

– Interval recording

– Frame recording

When you select OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT

Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. While the image is

being stored, the indicators flash fast, and the playback picture disappears. At this

stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape condition.

Usin g t h e fa d e r

When you set the POWER sw itch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

You cannot use the fader.

While using BOUNCE, you cannot use the follow ing functions:

– Zoom

– Picture effect

– Shutter speed adjustment

– Exposure

– Flexible Spot meter

– Focus manually

– Spot Focus

Note on BOUNCE

The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following mode or functions:

– When D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings

– Wide mode

– Picture effect

– PROGRAM AE

Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Pict u re e ffe ct

You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.

NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.

SEPIA :

The picture appears in sepia.

B&W :

The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).

SOLARIZE [b ] : The light intensity becomes clearer, to make the picture look more like

an illustration.

SLIM [c] :

The picture expands vertically.

STRETCH [d ] : The picture expands horizontally.

MOSAIC [e ] : The picture appears mosaic-patterned.

[a ]

[b ]

[c]

[d ]

[e ]

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Press MENU, then select P EFFECT in

with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial (p. 208).

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.

MANUAL SET

OFF

NEG. ART

SEPIA

B&W

SOLARIZE

SLIM

EFFECT

FLASH LVL

AUTO SHTR

RETURN

STRETCH

MOSAIC

[

] :

MENU END

To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct

Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.

Note

The following functions do not work during the picture effect

– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or recording

standby

– BOUNCE

– OLD MOVIE

When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)

Picture effect is automatically canceled.

Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct

You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions.

Sound is recorded normally.

STILL

You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

You can record still images successively at constant intervals.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.

TRAIL

You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.

OLD MOVIE

You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically

sets the wide mode to ON and picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter

speed.

Still image

Moving picture

STILL

LUMI.

Still image

Moving picture

Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct

(1) Press FN to display PAGE1 while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.

(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.

(3) Press a desired mode. In the STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored

in memory.

(4) Press –/+ to adjust the effect.

– : To reduce the effect

+: To increase the effect

Items to be adjusted

STILL

The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving

picture

FLASH

LUMI.

The interval of frame by frame playback

The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be

swapped with a moving picture

TRAIL

The vanishing time of the incidental image

OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary

(5) Press

OK to return to PAGE1.

2~4

DIG

DIG EFFT

OFF

DIG EFFT

OFF

EFFT

OLD

MOVIE

LUMI.

STILL

FLASH LUMI.

TRAIL

–

The bar appears when setting following

digital effects modes : STILL, FLASH,

LUMI., TRAIL.

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct

Press

OFF to return to PAGE1.

Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct

Notes

•The following functions do not work during digital effect:

– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or recording

standby

– Tape photo recording

– Fader

– Shutter speed (1/30 or smaller) adjustment

•The following functions do not work in the old movie:

– Wide mode

– Picture effect

– PROGRAM AE

– Shutter speed adjustment

When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)

Digital effect is automatically canceled.

Pre se t t in g t h e a d ju st m e n t fo r p ict u re

q u a lit y – Cu st o m p re se t

You can preset the camcorder to record the picture with the desired picture quality.

When presetting, adjust the picture by shooting a subject and checking the picture

displayed on a TV (p. 45).

(1) Press CUSTOM PRESET to display the CUSTOM PRESET menu while the

POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950

only).

(2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.

(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the selected item, then press the dial.

(7) Press CUSTOM PRESET.

The CUSTOM PRESET menu disappears and the indicator

screen.

appears on the

CUSTOM PRESET

STBY

2-4

SET

OFF

COLOR LVL

SHARPNESS

WB SH I FT

AE SH I FT

AGC LIMIT

RESET

RETURN

CUSTOM PRESET

STBY

SET

OFF

COLOR LVL

[

] :

CP END

SHARPNESS

WB SH I FT

AE SH I FT

AGC LIMIT

RESET

RETURN

CUSTOM PRESET

STBY

SET

COLOR LVL

[

] :

CP END

CUSTOM

PRESET

SHARPNESS

CUSTOM PRESET

STBY

WB SH I FT

AE SH I FT

AGC LIMIT

RESET

SET

OFF

COLOR LVL

SHARPNESS

WB SH I FT

AE SH I FT

AGC LIMIT

RESET

RETURN

OFF

[

] :

CP END

[

] :

CP END

CUSTOM PRESET

SET

STBY

5,6

COLOR LVL

SHARPNESS

WB SH I FT

AE SH I FT

AGC LIMIT

RESET

RETURN

CUSTOM PRESET

STBY

COLOR LVL

CP END

[

] :

[

] :

CP END

Pre se t t in g t h e a d ju st m e n t fo r p ict u re q u a lit y – Cu st o m p re se t

Items to be adjusted

Item

Meaning

Adjustment value

COLOR LVL

Color intensity

Decreases color intensity y

Increases color intensity

SHARPNESS

WB SHIFT

AE SHIFT

AGC LIMIT

RESET

Sharpness

Softer y Sharper

Bluish y Reddish

Dim y Brighten

6 dB/ 12 dB/ OFF

White balance

Brightness

Auto Gain-limit

Sets items above to the default

settings.

To ca n ce l u sin g t h e cu st o m p re se t

Select OFF in step 4. The setting is still maintained at this moment. To return to the

standard setting, select RESET in step 6.

To ch e ck t h e cu st o m p re se t se t t in g

Press CUSTOM PRESET while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/

NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

The custom preset setting appears on the screen.

When you preset the desired picture quality in CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only)

The preset is only available in each mode you preset. If you want to use a preset both in

CAMERA and MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only), you have to preset in each

mode.

When you manually adjust the exposure

AE SHIFT cannot be selected.

About the AGC Limit

When adjusting the exposure manually, the level of the gain is up to 18 dB (OFF).

Usin g t h e g u id e fra m e

You can easily make the picture be on a horizontal line using the guide frame. The

guide frame is not recorded in the tape or the “Memory Stick.”

(1) Set GUIDE FRAME in

to ON in the menu setting while the POWER

switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

(p210)

(2) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The guide frame is displayed on the

screen.

LCD/VF SET

LCD B. L.

LCD COLOR

VF B. L.

GU I DEFRAME OFF

RETURN

LCD/VF SET

LCD B. L.

LCD COLOR

VF B. L.

GU I DEFRAME ON

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

To cle a r t h e g u id e fra m e

Select GUIDE FRAME to OFF in the menu setting or simply press DISPLAY/TOUCH

PANEL.

Note

The guide frame indicates only a rough level. The size and position of the guide

frame do not affect the setting of the camcorder.

If you set GUIDEFRAME to ON

The other indicators are also displayed on the screen.

Sh o o t in g w it h t h e ze b ra p a t t e rn

You can set the camcorder to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the portion of

the picture on the screen with a subject whose brightness exceeds a certain level. You

can check the picture level of a subject by displaying the zebra pattern. Use the zebra

pattern as a guide for adjusting the exposure so that you can get the desired picture.

The zebra pattern is not recorded in the tape or the “Memory Stick.”

Set the ZEBRA selector to 70 or 100 while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or

MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

ZEBRA

OFF 70 100

Setting

Meaning

The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the screen with

a subject whose brightness is about 70 IRE.

The zebra pattern appears in the portion of the picture on the screen with

a subject whose brightness exceeds more than 100 IRE.

100

The zebra pattern does not appear on the screen.

OFF

To e ra se t h e ze b ra p a t t e rn

Set the ZEBRA selector to OFF.

When the ZEBRA selector is set to 100

The portion of the picture where zebra pattern appears is an area of high brightness and

overexposure.

Usin g t h e co lo r b a r

If you press COLOR BAR, the color bar is displayed on the screen.

Use the color bar in the following cases:

– At the beginning of the recording, the recorded images may be unstable. To avoid

this, record the color bar first and start recording the desired images when the

captured images become clear.

– To adjust screen color.

Press COLOR BAR while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.

If you press COLOR BAR again the color bar disappears.

COLOR BAR

When you adjust color on the screen

Connect your camcorder to the TV (p. 45) and adjust image color on the TV screen.

While the color bar is displayed

The following functions do not work. However, the settings before the color bar is

displayed are retained.

– BACK LIGHT

– SPOT LIGHT

– Picture effect

– Digital effect

– PROGRAM AE

– Shutter speed adjustment

– White balance adjustment

– Exposure

– MEMORY MIX

While the color bar is displayed during Picture effect, Digital effect or MEMORY

MIX

These effects cannot be added on the color bar.

While using the fader

The color bar cannot be displayed.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

AUTO LOCK se le ct o r

Set the selector as shown below to maintain or release the settings of the functions.

Manually adjusted functions are retained even if you set the AUTO LOCK selector to

AUTO LOCK. However, all functions will automatically return to the default settings

five minutes after removing the power supply.

AUTO LOCK [a]

Select this position to lock the PROGRAM AE, Shutter speed, White balance, Exposure

and Flexible spot meter functions in order to make these function automatically

adjusted. We recommend that you set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK if you

use the video flash light (optional).

AUTO LOCK release [b]

Select this position for setting the functions manually.

HOLD [c]

Select AUTO LOCK release [b], and set the functions manually. Select this position [c]

to maintain the settings.

[b ]

[a ]

[c]

AUTO

LOCK

HOLD

Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE

You can select the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) to suit your specific shooting

requirements.

Soft portrait

This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as

people or flowers.

Sports lesson

This mode minimizes camera-shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.

Beach & ski

This mode prevents people’s faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,

such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.

Sunset & moon

This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general

night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.

Landscape

This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains, and

prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you

are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while

the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK(DCR-TRV950

only). (p. 67)

(2) Press PROGRAM AE.

(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.

The indicator changes as follows:

PROGRAM

AUTO

LOCK

HOLD

To ca n ce l t h e PROGRAM AE

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the AUTO LOCK or press PROGRAM AE.

The PROGRAM AE indicator disappears.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

Notes

•Because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance,

you cannot take close-ups in the following modes:

– Sports lesson

– Beach & ski

•Your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects in the following modes:

– Sunset & moon

– Landscape

•The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE:

– BOUNCE

– OLD MOVIE

– Shutter speed adjustment

– Spot focus

•When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only),

Sports lesson does not work. (The indicator flashes.)

The PROGRAM AE does not w ork

When you are recording images on a “Memory Stick” using the MEMORY MIX. (The

indicator flashes.)

While WHT BAL is set to automatic adjustment

The white balance is adjusted even if the PROGRAM AE is selected.

You can adjust the follow ing functions w hile using the PROGRAM AE

– Backlight

– Spot light

– Exposure

– Flexible Spot Meter

When recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp

or mercury lamp

Flickering phenomenon which lights up or dims the screen, or the color change may

occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE off.

– Soft portrait

– Sports lesson

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

Ad ju st in g t h e sh u t t e r sp e e d

You can adjust the shutter speed manually to suit your preference and with its shutter

speed fixed.

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while the

POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK(DCR-TRV950

only). (p. 67)

(2) Press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter speed indicator appears on the screen.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired speed. The available

shutter speed ranges from 1/4 to 1/10000. As you turn the dial, the shutter

speed changes as follows:

[CAMERA] 1/4 y 1/8 y 1/15 y 1/30 y ... y 1/4000 y 1/6000

y 1/10000

[MEMORY/NETWORK] 1/60 y 1/90 y 1/100 y 1/125 y 1/180

y 1/250 y 1/350 y 1/500

The shutter speed increases when a smaller number is selected. The size of the

picture displayed on the screen also increases. Conversely, the shutter speed is

slower when a larger number is selected. The picture displayed on the screen

will thus decrease in size.

SHUTTER

SPEED

AUTO

LOCK

HOLD

To re t u rn t o a u t o m a t ic sh u t t e r sp e e d m o d e

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press SHUTTER SPEED. The shutter

speed indicator disappears.

Notes

•If you set the shutter speed value to 1/30 or smaller, You cannot use the flash and the

digital effect.

•The Shutter speed cannot be adjusted while you are using the following functions.

– PROGRAM AE

– Exposure

– Flexible spot meter

If you press PROGRAM AE

Shutter speed adjusted manually returns to the automatic shutter speed.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

When the shutter speed is fast

When shooting a bright subject, vertical lines may appear on the image, but this is not

a malfunction. In such cases, set the shutter speed a little slower.

When shooting at slow shutter speed

At slow shutter speed, automatic focus may be lost. Use a tripod and adjust the focus

manually.

When recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp

or mercury lamp

Flickering phenomenon which lights up or dims the screen, or the color change may

occur depending on the shutter speed.

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

Shutter speeds available in the MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) mode are

different from those in the CAMERA mode.

Even if you set the shutter speed faster than 1/ 500 or slower than 1/ 60 while the

POWER switch is set to CAMERA, the shutter speed setting is automatically reset to

1/ 500 or 1/ 60 respectively if you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only). Once you have set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only) as the operation above, the shutter speed remains at 1/ 500 or

1/ 60 even if you set the POWER switch to CAMERA again.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

Ad ju st in g t h e w h it e b a la n ce

White balance adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural

color balance for camera recording. You can obtain better results by adjusting the white

balance manually when lighting conditions change quickly or when recording

outdoors: e.g., neon signs, fireworks.

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while

the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only). (p. 67)

(2) Press WHT BAL.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the appropriate white balance mode

under the following conditions. As you turn the dial, the display changes as

follows:

(One-push white balance) y

(Outdoor) y n (Indoor)

WHT BAL

AUTO

LOCK

HOLD

Indicator

Shooting conditions

(One-push

w hite balance)

•Adjusting the white balance according to the light source. Follow the

procedure described on the next page to adjust the setting again.

•Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon

signs, or fireworks

(Outdoor)

•Under a color matching fluorescent lamp

•Lighting condition changes quickly

•Too bright a place such as a photography studio

n (Indoor)

•Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

If yo u h a ve se le ct e d

in st e p 3

When you set the white balance to one-push white balance mode, the setting is locked

and maintained even if lighting conditions change. You can achieve recording with

natural colors without the image being affected by ambient light.

(1) Shoot a white object such as paper fully with

recording standby.

displayed on the screen in the

(2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

The

indicator flashes quickly. When the white balance has been adjusted and stored

in the memory, the indicator stops flashing. The setting will be maintained even after

removing the power supply.

To re t u rn t o a u t o m a t ic a d ju st m e n t

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press WHT BAL. The white balance

indicator disappears.

If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting

We recommend that you record in the n (indoor) mode.

When you record under fluorescent lamp

Use the automatic white balance mode or the

(one-push white balance) mode.

Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly if you use the n (indoor)

mode.

Shooting w hen lighting conditions have changed

Readjust the white balance while the camcorder is in standby mode. White balance

cannot be adjusted in the

(One-push white balance) mode during recording.

If the indicator does not stop flashing after you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial

The white balance cannot be set. Use the automatic mode for recording.

In automatic w hite balance mode

Point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER

switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:

– You detach the battery for replacement.

– You bring your camcorder outdoors from the interior of a house, or vice versa.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re

You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Adjust the exposure manually in the

following cases:

– When you need a fine adjustment for the backlit subjects.

– When shooting subjects and dark backgrounds.

– When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully.

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while

the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK(DCR-TRV950

only). (p. 67)

(2) Press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator appears.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.

EXPOSURE

AUTO

LOCK

HOLD

To re t u rn t o a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press EXPOSURE. The exposure

indicator disappears.

When you adjust the exposure manually, the follow ing functions do not w ork:

– Backlight

– Spot light

– Shutter speed adjustment

If you press PROGRAM AE

Your camcorder also returns to automatic exposure.

Sh o o t in g w it h m a n u a l a d ju st m e n t

Usin g t h e sp o t lig h t -m e t e rin g – Fle xib le Sp o t Me t e r

You can take a picture with the appropriate exposure automatically for just the point

you want to focus on and with its exposure fixed. Use the Flexible Spot Meter in the

following cases:

– When adjusting the exposure manually to shoot the backlit subjects.

– When there is strong contrast between the subject and background such as with a

subject that is on stage and lighted by a spotlight.

(1) Set the AUTO LOCK selector to the center (auto lock release) position while

the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only). (p. 67)

(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.

(3) Press SPOT METER. The SPOT METER screen appears.

(4) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen.

The SPOT METER indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The exposure of the

point you selected is adjusted.

(5) Press

OK to return to PAGE1.

3~5

SPOT METER

PAGE1 PAGE2

EXIT

SPOT

METER

END

SCH

SPOT

FOCUS EFFT

DIG

MEM

M I X METER

SPOT

AUTO

LOCK

HOLD

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To re t u rn t o a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re

Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK or press

AUTO to return to PAGE1.

The follow ing functions do not w ork during Flexible Spot Meter

– Backlight

– Spot light

– Shutter speed adjustment

If you press PROGRAM AE

Your camcorder also returns to automatic exposure.

Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly

You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases.

Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.

•The autofocus is not effective when shooting:

– Subjects through glass coated with water droplets

– Horizontal stripes

– Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky

•When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in

the background.

•Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.

(1) Set FOCUS to MAN while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or

MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

The 9 indicator appears.

(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.

FOCUS

AUTO

MAN

INFINITY

Focus ring

PUSH AUTO

To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s

Set FOCUS to AUTO.

To re co rd d ist a n t su b je ct s

When you set FOCUS to INFINITY, the focus changes to a setting appropriate for an

object in the far distance, and the

indicator appears. When you release FOCUS, your

camcorder returns to the manual focus. Use this mode when your camcorder focuses on

near objects even though you are trying to shoot a distant object.

To sh o o t w it h a u t o fo cu sin g m o m e n t a rily

Press PUSH AUTO.

The auto focus functions while you are pressing PUSH AUTO.

Use this button to focus on one subject and then another with smooth focusing.

When you release PUSH AUTO, manual focusing resumes.

Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly

To focus precisely

It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the “W” (wide-angle)

after focusing at the “T” (telephoto) position.

When you shoot close to the subject

Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.

9 changes as follow s:

when recording a distant subject

when the subject is too close to focus on

Focal distance information is displayed for about three seconds on the screen in

the follow ing cases:

– When switching the focus adjustment mode from autofocus to manual

– When turning the focus ring

Focal distance information

– This information aids focusing if it is not easy to focus on the subject, for example,

when recording in the dark. Use this information as a rough guide to get a sharp

focus.

– You cannot get correct information if you have attached a conversion lens (optional)

to your camcorder.

Usin g t h e sp o t fo cu s – Sp o t Fo cu s

You can take a picture with the appropriate focus automatically for just the point you

want to focus on and with its focus fixed.

(1) Set FOCUS to MAN while the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or

MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.

(3) Press SPOT FOCUS. The SPOT FOCUS screen appears.

(4) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen.

The SPOT FOCUS indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The spot focus of the

point you selected is adjusted.

(5) Press

OK to return to PAGE1.

3~5

SPOT FOCUS

PAGE1 PAGE2

EXIT

SPOT

FOCUS

END

SCH

SPOT

FOCUS EFFT

DIG

MEM

M I X METER

SPOT

FOCUS

AUTO

MAN

INFINITY

PUSH AUTO

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s

Set FOCUS to AUTO.

When Using PROGRAM AE

Spot focus do not work.

Focal distance information

It is not displayed on the screen.

Ad ju st in g re co rd in g le ve l m a n u a lly – So u n d

re co rd in g le ve l

You can adjust the recording sound level. Use headphones to monitor the sound when

you adjust it.

(1) Set MIC LEVEL in

to MANUAL in the menu setting while the POWER

switch is set to CAMERA or VCR. (p. 214)

(2) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

(3) Press AUDIO LEVEL to display the recording level adjustment display in

standby mode.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the recording level.

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUD I O MODE

REMA I N

M I C LEVEL

RETURN

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUD I O MODE

REMA I N

M I C LEVEL

RETURN

AUDIO LEVEL

AUTO

MANUAL

30 20 12

0 dB

[a ]

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[b ][c]

[a] Recording level meter

[b] Decreases the recording level

[c] Increases the recording level

To cle a r t h e re co rd in g le ve l a d ju st m e n t d isp la y

Press AUDIO LEVEL.

To re t u rn t o a u t o m a t ic re co rd in g so u n d le ve l

Set MIC LEVEL to AUTO in the menu setting.

Ad ju st in g re co rd in g le ve l m a n u a lly – So u n d re co rd in g le ve l

Notes on the manual adjustment

•The recording level setting is retained for about five minutes even after removing the

power supply.

•The recording level indicator appears at the lower-right on the screen.

The sound input through the AUDIO/VIDEO jack or the DV Interface

You cannot adjust the recording level.

When MIC LEVEL is set to AUTO

You cannot adjust the recording level, however, the recording level adjustment display

is displayed.

In t e rva l re co rd in g

You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record

and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, gradual

appearances, etc., with this function.

Example

1 s

[a ]

9 min 59 s

10 min

9 min 59 s

10 min

[b ]

[c]

[a ]REC TIME

[b ]Waiting time

[c] INTERVAL

(1) In the standby, set INT. REC in

to SET in the menu setting. (p. 209)

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set INTERVAL and REC TIME.

1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.

2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then

press the dial.

The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN

3 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.

4 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then

press the dial.

The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC

5 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

RETURN, then press the dial.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.

CAMERA SET

ZOOM

PHOTO REC

16:9WIDE

STBY

CAMERA SET

INT. REC

INTERVAL

REC TIME

RETURN

STBY

30SEC

STEADYSHOT

FRAME REC

INT. REC

OFF

SET

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

CAMERA SET

INT. REC

INTERVAL

REC TIME

RETURN

STBY

30SEC

CAMERA SET

INT. REC

INTERVAL

REC TIME

RETURN

STBY

30SEC

1MIN

5MIN

10MIN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

CAMERA SET

INT. REC

INTERVAL

REC TIME

RETURN

STBY

0.5SEC

CAMERA SET

INT. REC

INTERVAL

REC TIME

RETURN

STBY

CAMERA SET

ZOOM

PHOTO REC

16:9WIDE

STBY

0.5SEC

1SEC

1.5SEC

2SEC

STEADYSHOT

FRAME REC

INT. REC

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

(continued on the following page)

In t e rva l re co rd in g

POWER

MEMORY/

NETWORK

STBY

INTERVAL

(4) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The INTERVAL indicator flashes.

(5) Press START/ STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL indicator

lights up.

To ca n ce l t h e in t e rva l re co rd in g

Perform either of the following:

– Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.

– Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.

To p e rfo rm n o rm a l re co rd in g d u rin g t h e in t e rva l re co rd in g

Press START/ STOP.

The INTERVAL indicator flashes. During the waiting time you can perform normal

recording only once.

To stop normal recording, press START/ STOP again. Step4 is displayed on the screen.

On recording time

There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to +/ – six frames from the

selected time.

When pressing START/STOP during recording time

Interval recording stops. To restart it, press START/ STOP again.

Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g

– Fra m e re co rd in g

You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.

To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording.

We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote

Commander after step 3.

(1) In the standby, set FRAME REC in

(2) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

The FRAME REC indicator lights up.

to ON in the menu setting. (p.209)

(3) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a

recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.

(4) Move the subject, and repeat step 3.

POWER

MEMORY/

NETWORK

CAMERA SET

ZOOM

PHOTO REC

16:9WIDE

STEADYSHOT

FRAME REC OFF

INT. REC

RETURN

STBY

CAMERA SET

ZOOM

STBY

PHOTO REC

16:9WIDE

STEADYSHOT

FRAME REC ON

INT. REC

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

To ca n ce l t h e fra m e re co rd in g

Perform either of the following:

– Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.

– Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.

Note

The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use this function continuously.

When using the frame recording

The last recorded frame is longer than other frames.

— Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —

Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h p ict u re e ffe ct

During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effect:

NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.

(1) In the playback or playback pause, press MENU, then select P EFFECT in

with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial (p. 208).

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.

For details of each picture effect, see page 58.

MANUAL SET

EFFECT

OFF

NEG. ART

SEPIA

B&W

SOLARIZE

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct

Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.

Notes

•You cannot process externally input scenes using picture effect.

•You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the

image using the picture effect. However, you can record images on a “Memory Stick”

(p. 144, 156), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by picture effect

Pictures processed by picture effect are not output through the DV Interface.

When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back

Picture effect is automatically canceled.

Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct

During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effect:

STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.

(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.

(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.

(3) Press a desired mode. In the STILL or LUMI., the picture where you select the

mode is stored in memory as a still image.

(4) Press –/+ to adjust the effect. Refer to page 60 for details.

(5) Press

OK to return to PAGE2.

2,3

DIG EFFT

OFF

DIG

EFFT

STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct

Press

OFF to return to PAGE2.

Notes

•You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect.

•You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the

image using digital effect. However, you can record images on a “Memory Stick”

(p. 144, 156), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by digital effect

Pictures processed by digital effect are not output through the DV Interface.

When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back

Digital effect is automatically canceled.

En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e s

– Ta p e PB ZOOM

You can enlarge playback images recorded on tapes. Besides the operation described

here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded on the “Memory Stick” (p. 173).

(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.

(2) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.

(3) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen.

The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback

image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area

again, the area moves to the center of the screen.

(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.

You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its

size.

W: Decreases the zoom ratio.

T: Increases the zoom ratio.

PB ZOOM

× 5.0

END

PB ZOOM

ZOOM

END

To ca n ce l t h e PB ZOOM

Press

END.

En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e s – Ta p e PB ZOOM

Notes

•You cannot process externally input scenes using the PB ZOOM.

•You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the

image using the tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images on a VCR using

your camcorder as a player.

•You cannot record moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” on your camcorder when

you have processed the picture using the tape PB ZOOM.

The PB ZOOM is automatically canceled w hen you activate the follow ing:

– Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

– Stop playback.

– Press MENU.

– Insert a “Memory Stick”.

Pictures in the PB ZOOM

Pictures in the PB ZOOM are not output through the DV Interface and the (USB)

jack.

In the PB ZOOM

If you press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen

disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.

Edge of the enlarged image

The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.

Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e

– ZERO SET MEMORY

Your camcorder goes forward or backward to automatically stop at a desired scene

having a tape counter value of “0:00:00”. Use the Remote Commander for this

operation.

(1) In the playback, press DISPLAY when the tape counter does not appear.

(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape

counter shows “0:00:00” and then starts counting. The ZERO SET MEMORY

indicator flashes.

(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.

(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counter’s zero point. The tape stops

automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO

SET MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.

(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counter’s zero point.

ZERO SET MEMORY

DISPLAY

Notes

•When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory

will be canceled.

•There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.

•The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears when you press FN.

If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions

The zero set memory may not work correctly.

Se a rch in g t h e b o u n d a rie s o f a re co rd e d

t a p e b y t it le – TITLE SEARCH

If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of a

recorded tape by title. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Before operation

Set CM SEARCH in

to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the TITLE

SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:

TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH

(no indicator)

PHOTO SCAN

(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.

Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that

you selected.

TITLE SEARCH

HELLO!

MODE

CONGRATULATIONS!

HAPPY NEW YEAR!

PRESENT

GOOD MORNING

WEDDING

TITLE SEARCH

HAPPY NEW YEAR!

PRESENT

GOOD MORNING

WEDDING

NIGHT

BASEBALL

[b ] [a ]

[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for

[b ] Present point on the tape

To st o p se a rch in g

Press x.

If you use a cassette w ithout cassette memory

You cannot superimpose or search a title.

If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions

The title search may not work correctly.

To superimpose a title

See page 119.

Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e

– DATE SEARCH

You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start

playback from that point (date search). Use a cassette with cassette memory for

convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each

recording date.

Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry

Before operation

•You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.

•Set CM SEARCH in

to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE

SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:

TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH

(no indicator)

PHOTO SCAN

(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.

Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected

date.

DATE SEARCH

SEP/ 5/02

SEP/ 6/02

DEC/24/02

JAN/ 1/03

FEB/ 11/03

APR/29/03

MODE

DATE SEARCH

SEP/ 5/02

SEP/ 6/02

DEC/24/02

JAN/ 1/03

FEB/ 11/03

APR/29/03

[b ] [a ]

[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for

[b ] Present point on the tape

To st o p se a rch in g

Press x.

Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e – DATE SEARCH

Note

If one day’s recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find

the point where the recording date changes.

If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions

DATE SEARCH may not work correctly.

Cassette memory

The tape with cassette memory can hold six recording dates. If you search among seven

or more dates, see “Searching for the date without using cassette memory” below.

Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then select CM SEARCH in

to OFF with the SEL/PUSH

EXEC dial (p. 213).

(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE

SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:

DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)

(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press

> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder

automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time

you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.

To st o p se a rch in g

Press x.

Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o

– PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN

You can search for a still image you have recorded on a tape (PHOTO SEARCH).

You can also search for still images one after another and display each image for

five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (PHOTO SCAN). Use the

Remote Commander for these operations.

Use this function to check or edit still images.

Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry

Before operation

•You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.

•Set CM SEARCH in

to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the

PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:

TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH

(no indicator)

PHOTO SCAN

(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.

Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date

that you selected.

PHOTO SEARCH

SEP/ 5/02

SEP/ 6/02

DEC/24/02

JAN/ 1/03

FEB/ 11/03

APR/29/03

5 30PM

MODE

8 50AM

10 30AM

11 25PM

4 11PM

1 45PM

PHOTO SEARCH

SEP/ 5/02

SEP/ 6/02

DEC/24/02

JAN/ 1/03

FEB/ 11/03

APR/29/03

5 30PM

8 50AM

10 30AM

11 25PM

4 11PM

1 45PM

[b ] [a ]

[a ] : Actual point you are trying to search for

[b ] : Present point on the tape

To st o p se a rch in g

Press x.

Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o – PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN

Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CM SEARCH in

to OFF, then press the dial (p. 213).

(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the

PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:

DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)

(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the photo for playback.

Each time you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or

next photo.

Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.

To st o p se a rch in g

Press x.

Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o – PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN

Sca n n in g p h o t o s

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the

PHOTO SCAN indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:

TITLE SEARCH* t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH

(no indicator)

PHOTO SCAN

* Displayed only when CM SEARCH is set to ON in the menu settings.

(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander.

Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.

MODE

PHOTO 00

SCAN

To st o p sca n n in g

Press x.

If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions

PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN may not work correctly.

The available number of photos that can be searched using the cassette memory

The available number is up to 12 photos. However, you can search 13 photos or more

using the PHOTO SCAN.

— Ed it in g —

Du b b in g a t a p e

Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le

You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as

a player.

Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with

your camcorder.

Before operation

•Set DISPLAY in

to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

•Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be

superimposed on the edited tape:

On your camcorder:

DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL, DATA CODE

On the Remote Commander:

DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert

the recorded tape into your camcorder.

(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE.

Connect the A/V connecting cable to the AUDIO/VIDEO jack.

Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.

(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.

(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.

White

Yellow

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO/VIDEO

VCR

AUDIO

S VIDEO

: Signal flow

A/V connecting

cable (supplied)

Red

Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e

Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Du b b in g a t a p e

You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:

8 mm,

Betamax,

Hi8,

VHS,

ED Betamax,

S-VHS,

mini DV,

VHSC,

DV, Digital8,

S-VHSC,

MICRO MV

If your VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the

white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white

plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,

the right channel audio is output.

If your VCR has an S video jack

Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).

With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V

connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the

VCR.

This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

Du b b in g a t a p e

Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to the DV Interface on your camcorder and

to DV IN on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio

signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the

titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory or letters on the “Memory

Stick” index screen.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert

the recorded tape into your camcorder.

(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE. Refer to the

operating instructions of the VCR.

(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.

(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.

DV IN

: Signal flow

i. LINK cable (optional)

Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e

Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable

See page 233 for more information about i.LINK.

Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM

These pictures are not output through the DV Interface.

If you record a playback pause picture w ith the DV Interface

The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other

video equipment, the picture may jitter.

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s

– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating

the VCR.

Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.

Your camcorder can dub on a “Memory Stick.” See p. 160 for more information.

Unwanted scene

Switch the order

Be fo re o p e ra t in g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s

re co rd e d o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t

Step 1 Connecting the VCR.

Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation (p. 99, 103).

Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 104).

When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip steps 2 and 3.

Usin g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s re co rd e d o n o t h e r

e q u ip m e n t

Operation 1 Making a program (p. 106).

Operation 2 Performing the program (dubbing a tape) (p. 108).

Note

When editing digital video on tapes, the operation signals cannot be sent with the

LANC.

St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR

You can connect both an A/V connecting cable and an i.LINK cable.

When you use the A/V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 95.

When you use the i.LINK cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 97.

If you connect using the i.LINK cable

With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital

form for high-quality editing.

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le

To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared rays to the remote sensor on

the VCR.

When you connect using the A/V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps

(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.

(1) Se t t h e IR SETUP co d e

1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.

When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/VTR.

3 Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set VIDEO EDIT in

TAPE, then press the dial (p. 217).

4 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.

5 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.

6 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.

7 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP and turn the dial to select

IR SETUP code number of your VCR, then press the dial.

Check the code in “About IR SETUP codes.” (p. 100)

OTHERS

DATA CODE

BEEP

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

VIDEO EDIT READY

RETURN

OTHERS

DATA CODE

BEEP

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

VIDEO EDIT RETURN

RETURN

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

0 08 55 06

UNDO

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

TAPE

MEMORY

TOTAL 0 00 00 00

SCENE

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

UNDO

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

0 08 55 06

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

TOTAL 0 00 00 00

SCENE

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

i. LINK

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

RETURN

[

] :

[

] :

MENU END

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

About IR SETUP codes

The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the

correct code to match your VCR. The default setting is code number 3.

Brand

IR SETUP code

Brand

IR SETUP code

22, 23, 24, 28, 29

23, 32, 80

21, 33, 35

77, 78

Sony

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Mitsubishi/MGA

Multitech

NEC

Admiral (M. Wards) 89

Aiwa

47, 54, 80

Akai

49, 51

21, 35

Olympic

Optimus

Orion

Audio Dynamic

Bell&Howell

(M. Wards)

Panasonic

Pentax

16, 17, 77, 78

8, 42

Broksonic

Canon

21, 70, 82

77, 78

Philco

26, 70, 77, 78

47, 77, 78, 83

Citizen

Philips

Craig

47, 73

Pioneer

Curtis Mathis

Daewoo

DBX

8, 77, 80

Quasar

6, 16, 17, 77, 78

26, 40, 77

RCA/PROSCAN

7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 78*, 83,

101

21, 33, 35

Dimensia

Emerson

Fisher

Realistic

Sansui

22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88

26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82

36, 37, 44, 45

Singer

Funai

Samsung

Sanyo

24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*

General Electric

Goldstar/LG

GO VIDEO

Hitachi

8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101

26, 36, 37, 47

Scott

22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41

Sharp

88, 89

8, 42, 78

Shintom

Signature 2000

Sylvania

Symphonic

Tashiro

Tatung

Teac

80, 89

Instant Replay

JC Penny

JVC

77, 78

77, 78, 80, 83

8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77

12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35

21, 33, 35, 47

36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80

17, 77, 78, 83

21, 33, 35

Kenwood

LXI (Sears)

Magnavox

Marantz

Marta

21, 33, 35

21, 33, 35, 80

77, 78

Technics

Toshiba

Wards

7, 40, 49

37, 47, 88, 89, 95

21, 33, 35, 36

Memorex

Minolta

37, 77

Yamaha

Zenith

8, 42

* TV/VCR component

Note on IR SETUP codes

Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.

100

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

(2) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l t h e re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR

1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.

2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording pause

on the VCR, then press the dial.

Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE PAUSE

IR TEST

0 08 55 06

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE PAUSE

IR TEST

RETURN

REC

RETURN

] :

MENU END

[

] :

[

MENU END

Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR

The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:

– Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.

– Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.

– Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.

(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r

Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote

sensor of the VCR.

Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the

devices.

Infrared rays emitter

VCR

Remote sensor

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

101

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

(4) Co n firm in g VCR o p e ra t io n

1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set to recording pause.

2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.

3 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.

When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

0:08:55:06

”CUT–OUT” ENGAGE

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

REC PAUSE

RETURN

EXECUTE

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

0:08:55:06

COMPLETE

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

When the VCR does not operate correctly

•After checking the code in “About IR SETUP codes”, set the IR SETUP or the

PAUSEMODE again.

•Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.

•Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.

102

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le

When you connect using the i.LINK cable (optional), follow the procedure below.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV

input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch

to VCR/VTR.

(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set VIDEO EDIT in

TAPE, then press the dial (p. 217).

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.

(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.

OTHERS

DATA CODE

BEEP

OTHERS

DATA CODE

BEEP

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

UNDO

0 08 55 06

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

VIDEO EDIT READY

RETURN

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

ERASE ALL

START

VIDEO EDIT RETURN

EDIT SET

RETURN

TAPE

MEMORY

TOTAL 0 00 00 00

SCENE

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

0 08 55 06

UNDO

TOTAL 0 00 00 00

SCENE

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

VIDEO EDIT

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

0 08 55 06

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

i. LINK

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

RETURN

] :

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

RETURN

] :

[

MENU END

[

MENU END

When you connect using an i.LINK cable

You cannot dub the titles, display indicators.

103

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR

You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and

paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject a cassette from your camcorder.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, then set

to recording pause.

When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set to recording

pause.

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the

number values for adjusting the synchronization.

The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen.

When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.

(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.

Take a note of the first number value of each IN and the closing number value

of each OUT.

(5) Calculate the average of all the first number values of each IN, and the

average of all the last number values of each OUT.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-IN”, then press the dial.

(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of IN, then

press the dial.

The calculated start position for recording is set.

(8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-OUT”, then press the dial.

(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of OUT,

then press the dial.

The calculated stop position for recording is set.

(10)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

RETURN, then press the dial.

104

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

2,3

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

0 08 55 06

RETURN

EXECUTE

ENGAGE

PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE

IR TEST

[

RETURN

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

0 08 55 06

[

] :

MENU END

EXECUTING

”CUT–OUT” No. 5

IR SETUP IN

PAUSEMODE –60

IR TEST

[

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

0 08 55 06

VIDEO EDIT

EDIT SET

CONTROL

ADJ TEST

”CUT–IN”

”CUT–OUT”

IR SETUP

PAUSEMODE

IR TEST

0 08 55 06

COMPLETE

RETURN

MENU END

RETURN

[

] :

[

] :

MENU END

Notes

•When you complete step 3, the image used to adjust the synchronization is recorded

for about 50 seconds.

•If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the

tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before starting

recording.

•When the recording unit cannot be operated properly by the i.LINK cable, leave the

connection as it is, and make the A/V connecting cable settings (p. 99). Video and

audio are sent by digital signals.

105

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a p ro g ra m

(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for

recording into the VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set VIDEO EDIT in

TAPE, then press the dial (p. 217).

(3) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video

operation buttons, then pause playback.

You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.

(4) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to

select MARK, then press the dial.

The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark

changes to light blue.

(5) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video

operation buttons, then pause playback. You can fine-adjust one frame at a

time with EDITSEARCH.

(6) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program

mark changes to light blue.

(7) Repeat steps 3 to 6, then set the program.

When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.

You can set up to 20 programs in maximum.

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

0 08 55 06

OTHERS

DATA CODE

BEEP

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

VIDEO EDIT READY

RETURN

OTHERS

DATA CODE

BEEP

COMMANDER

DISPLAY

VIDEO EDIT RETURN

RETURN

UNDO

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

TAPE

TOTAL 0 00 00 00

SCENE

MEMORY

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

UNDO

N X 0 08 55 06

OUT

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

UNDO

N X 0 09 07 06

N X 0 10 01 23

UNDO

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

ERASE ALL

START

EDIT SET

TOTAL 0 00 00 00

SCENE

TOTAL 0 00 12 00

SCENE

TOTAL 0 00 47 12

SCENE

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

106

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t

Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.

(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.

(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.

Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s

(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL.

(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.

To cancel erasing all programs

Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.

To cancel a program you have set

Press MENU.

The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.

Note

You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing.

If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot set IN and OUT on the portion.

If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape

The total time may not be displayed correctly.

107

Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)

Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a t a p e )

Make sure that your camcorder and the VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to

recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable, the following procedure is not

necessary.

When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/VTR.

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START.

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.

The program mark flashes.

The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator

appears during edit on the screen.

The PROGRAM indicator changes to light blue after dubbing ends.

When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.

To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g

Press x using the video operation buttons.

To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g

Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO

EDIT in the menu settings.

Press MENU to erase the menu display.

You cannot record on the VCR w hen:

– The tape has run out.

– The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.

– The IR SETUP code is not correct. (when IR is selected)

– The button to cancel recording pause is not correct. (when IR is selected)

NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:

– The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.

– i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable is not connected.

– The power of the connected VCR is not turned on. (when you set i.LINK)

108

Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s

Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le

You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/

audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.

Before operation

Set DISPLAY in

to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If

you are recording a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.

(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,

then immediately press X on your camcorder.

(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select

a TV program if you are recording from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR

appears on the screen.

(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording

from.

REC

PAUSE

AUDIO/

VIDEO

Yellow

White

OUT

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

VCR

: Signal flow

Red

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e

Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r

In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5,

press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.

109

Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s

If your TV or VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video output jack and the

white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white

plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,

the right channel audio is output.

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack

Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).

With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V

connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the

TV or VCR.

This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

Note on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3

are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous

remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,

we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with

black paper.

110

Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s

Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to the DV Interface on your camcorder and

to DV OUT on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio

signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder,

and insert the recorded tape into the VCR.

(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,

then immediately press X on your camcorder.

(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on

the screen.

(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording

from.

REC

PAUSE

DV OUT

: Signal flow

i.LINK cable (optional)

Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e

Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r

In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5,

press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.

111

Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s

You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable

During digital editing

The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed

picture.

If you record playback pause picture w ith the DV Interface

The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your

camcorder, the picture may jitter.

Before recording

Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

The DV IN indicator may appear on both equipment.

Note on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3

are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous

remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,

we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with

black paper.

112

In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR

– In se rt Ed it in g

You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by

specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this

operation. Connections are the same as on page 109 or 111.

Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to insert into the VCR.

[a ]

[A]

[b ]

[c]

[B]

[C]

[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed

[B]: A tape before editing

[C]: A tape after editing

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then press

X to set the VCR to the playback pause.

(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c]. Then press X to set your

camcorder to the playback pause.

(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET

MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in

memory. The tape counter shows “0:00:00.”

(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] by pressing m, then press

z REC and the button on its right simultaneously.

(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder

to start inserting the new scene.

Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your

camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause.

113

In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR – In se rt Ed it in g

REC

0:00:00

ZERO SET

MEMORY

ZERO SET

MEMORY

To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t

Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY

indicator and begin from step 3.

Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r

In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 6,

press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.

Note

Pictures and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will

be erased when you insert the new scene.

If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder (including another

DCR-TRV940/TRV950)

The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a

tape recorded on your camcorder.

When the inserted picture is played back

Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a

malfunction.

Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP

mode.

To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point

Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting.

If you press FN

The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator is not display.

Note on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3

are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous

remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,

we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with

black paper.

114

Au d io d u b b in g

You can record audio to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio

equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to

your recorded tape already recorded in the 12-bit mode by specifying the start and end

points. The original sound will not be erased.

Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Select one of the following connections to add audio.

Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e w it h t h e MIC ja ck

MIC

(PLUG IN POWER)

Microphone (optional)

: Signal flow

You can check recorded picture and sound by connecting your camcorder to a TV with

the A/V connecting cable.

Recorded sound is not output from a speaker. Check the sound by using a TV or

headphones.

Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e t o t h e in t e llig e n t a cce sso ry sh o e

Intelligent accessory shoe

Microphone (optional)

115

Au d io d u b b in g

Co n n e ct in g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le t o t h e AUDIO/VIDEO ja ck

Audio equipment

LINE OUT

AUDIO/

VIDEO

AUDIO R (Red)

AUDIO L

(White)

Do not connect the

video (yellow) plug.

: Signal flow

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

Du b b in g w it h t h e b u ilt -in m icro p h o n e

No connection is necessary.

Notes

•When dubbing with the AUDIO/VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are

not output through the S VIDEO jack or the AUDIO/VIDEO jack. Check the recorded

picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones.

•You cannot add audio with the DV Interface.

If you make all the connections

The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order:

•MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack

•Intelligent accessory shoe

•AUDIO/VIDEO jack

•Built-in microphone

116

Au d io d u b b in g

Ad d in g a u d io o n a re co rd e d t a p e

Choose a connection described on the previous pages, and connect audio equipment or

microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below.

(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.

(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.

(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point

where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback

pause.

(4) Press AUDIO DUB . The green X indicator appears on the screen.

(5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time.

The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While audio is

being recorded, the red

appears on the screen.

(6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording.

AUDIO DUB

When you dub the recorded sound

You can adjust the recorded sound by using MIC LEVEL (p. 79). However, when the

camcorder is connected to the AUDIO/VIDEO jack, sound cannot be adjusted.

To add audio more precisely

Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to

stop recording later in the playback.

Carry out from steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO

SET MEMORY was pressed.

117

Au d io d u b b in g

Mo n it o rin g t h e n e w re co rd e d so u n d

(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select AUDIO MIX in

settings, then press the dial.

in the menu

VCR SET

HiFi SOUND

AUDIO MIX

A/VcDV OUT ST1

ST2

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the balance between the original

sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2), then press the dial.

Five minutes after you remove the power supply or the battery pack, the AUDIO MIX

setting returns to original sound (ST1) only. The default setting is original sound only.

Notes

•New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).

•New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.

•You cannot add audio on the blank portion of the tape.

If an i.LINK cable (optional) is connected to your camcorder

You cannot add audio to a recorded tape.

We recommend that you add audio on a tape recorded w ith your camcorder

If you add audio on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including another

DCR-TRV940/TRV950), the sound quality may become worse.

If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock

You cannot record on a tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

118

Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title. When

you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point

where you superimposed it.

VACATION

(1) In the recording , recording standby, playback or playback pause, press

MENU, then select TITLE in

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 213).

, then press the dial.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.

The title flashes.

(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.

1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE or POSITION, then

press the dial. The selected item appears.

2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the

dial.

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.

(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.

In the recording, playback or playback pause:

The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title

is set.

In the standby:

The TITLE indicator appears. When you press START/STOP to start

recording, TITLE SAVE appears on the screen for five seconds, and the title is

set.

PRESET TITLE

HELLO!

HAPPY BIRTHDAY

HAPPY HOLIDAYS

CONGRATULATIONS!

OUR SWEET BABY

WEDDING

PRESET TITLE

HELLO!

HAPPY BIRTHDAY

HAPPY HOLIDAYS

CONGRATULATIONS!

OUR SWEET BABY

WEDDING

VACATION

THE END

VACATION

THE END

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

PRESET TITLE

HELLO!

HAPPY BIRTHDAY

HAPPY HOLIDAYS

CONGRATULATIONS!

OUR SWEET BABY

WEDDING

TITLE

VACATION

THE END

RETURN

[

] :

[

] :

[

] :

MENU END

EXEC SAVE MENU END

SIZE

SMALL

TITLE

SIZE

LARGE

VACATION

[

] :

[

] :

EXEC SAVE MENU END

119

Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le

If you set the w rite-protect tab of the tape to lock

You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write

protection.

To use a custom title

If you want to use a custom title, select

in step 2.

If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot superimpose a title on the portion.

If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions

Titles may not be displayed correctly.

Titles superimposed w ith your camcorder

•Titles are displayed by only the

DV format video equipment with an index titler.

•The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when

searching a recording with other video equipment.

If the tape has too many index signals

You may not be able to superimpose a title because memory becomes full. In this case,

delete data you do not need.

To not display titles

Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 213).

Title setting

•The title color changes as follows:

WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE

•The title size changes as follows:

SMALL y LARGE

You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size. If you input more than 12

characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.

•If you select SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position.

If you select LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position.

One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, w ith each title comprising five

characters

However, if the cassette memory is full with date, photo and cassette label data, one

cassette can have only up to about 11 titles each comprising five characters.

Cassette memory capacity is as follows:

– six date data

– 12 photo data

– one cassette label

If the “

FULL” mark appears

The cassette memory is full. Erase unwanted titles.

120

Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le

Era sin g a t it le

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE in

, then press the dial (p. 213).

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press

the dial. ERASE OK ? indicator appears.

(4) Make sure that the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH

EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.

(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

The ERASING flashes on the screen. When the title is erased, the COMPLETE

is displayed.

CM SET

TITLE ERASE

TITLE

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

CM SEARCH

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

RETURN

HELLO!

CONGRATULATIONS!

HAPPY NEW YEAR!

PRESENT

GOOD MORNING

WEDDING

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

TITLE ERASE

HELLO!

PRESENT

CONGRATULATIONS!

HAPPY NEW YEAR!

PRESENT

ERASE OK?

RETURN

EXECUTE

GOOD MORNING

WEDDING

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

To ca n ce l e ra sin g a t it le

Select RETURN in step 4 or 5.

121

Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s

You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each

title can have up to 20 characters.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE in

, then

press the dial (p. 213).

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

, then press the dial.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,

then press the dial.

(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,

then press the dial.

(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the

dial.

(7) Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have selected all characters and completed the

title.

(8) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

[SET], then press the dial.

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET

CUSTOM2 SET

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET

CUSTOM2 SET

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

TITLE SET

CUSTOM1 SET

CUSTOM2 SET

RETURN

––––––––––––––––––––

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

TITLE SET

–––––––––––––––––––

–

–––––––––––––––––––

–

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

TITLE SET

––––––––––––––––––––

TITLE SET

–––––––––––––––––––

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

122

Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s

To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d

In step 4, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want

to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to

select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter the

new title as desired.

If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in the standby w hile a

cassette is set in your camcorder

The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in

memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then

proceed from step 1.

We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that

your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.

To delete the title

Select [C]. The last character is erased.

To enter a space

Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part.

123

La b e lin g a ca sse t t e

If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. Labels can

consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert

the labeled cassette and when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or VCR, the

label is displayed for about five seconds.

(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.

(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.

(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE in

then press the dial (p. 213). Tape title display appears.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,

then press the dial.

(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the

dial.

(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you finish the label.

(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial.

The label is stored in the memory.

CM SET

TITLE

READY

4~6

TAPE TITLE

––––––––––

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

CM SEARCH

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

RETURN

TAPE TITLE

––––––––––

CM SET

TITLE

[

] :

MENU END

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

CM SEARCH

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

––––––––––

TAPE TITLE

[

] :

MENU END

––––––––––

–––––––––

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

124

La b e lin g a ca sse t t e

To e ra se t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e

In step 4 turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial. The last

character is erased.

To ch a n g e t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e

Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label.

If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock

You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.

If the tape has too many index signals

You may not be able to label a cassette because the cassette memory becomes full. In

this case, delete data you do not need.

If you have superimposed titles in the cassette

When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear.

When the “-----” indicator has few er than 10 spaces

The cassette memory is full.

The “-----” indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.

To delete the title

Select [P]. The last character is erased.

To enter a space

Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part.

Era sin g a ll t h e d a t a in ca sse t t e m e m o ry

You can erase all the data in cassette memory at once.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL in

then press the dial (p. 213).

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes

to EXECUTE.

CM SET

TITLE

CM SET

TITLE

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

CM SEARCH

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

RETURN

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

CM SEARCH

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

RETURN

EXECUTE

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

ERASING flashes on the screen. When all the data is erased, COMPLETE is

displayed.

To ca n ce l d e le t in g

Select RETURN with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial in step 3 or 4.

125

— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s —

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

You can record and play back images on the “Memory Stick” supplied with your

camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete images. You can exchange image

data with other equipment such as your computer etc., using the USB cable for the

“Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder.

On file fo rm a t

Still image (JPEG)

Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).

Moving picture (MPEG)

Your camcorder compresses picture data in MPEG format (extension .mpg).

Typ ica l im a g e d a t a file n a m e

Still image

100-0001:

This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.

Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer.

Moving picture

MOV00001:

This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.

Mov00001.mpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer.

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick”

Terminal

Write-protect switch

Labeling position

•You cannot record or erase images when the write-protect switch on the “Memory

Stick” is set to LOCK.

•The position and shape of the write-protect switch may be different depending on the

model.

•We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer.

•Image data may be damaged in the following cases:

– If you eject the “Memory Stick” or turn the power off during reading or writing.

– If you use a “Memory Stick” near static electricity or magnetic fields.

•Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts

of the terminal.

•Stick the label at the labeling position.

•Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to a “Memory Stick.”

•Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory Stick.”

•Do not let a “Memory Stick” get wet.

•Do not use or keep a “Memory Stick” in locations that are:

– Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun.

– Under direct sunlight

– Very humid or subject to corrosive gases

•When you carry or store a “Memory Stick,” put it in its case.

126

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

“ Me m o ry St ick” fo rm a t t e d o n co m p u t e r

The “Memory Stick” formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh computers is not

guaranteed compatible with your camcorder.

No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y

•Image data files recorded on the “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform with the

Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA

(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot

play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-

TRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/D770) that does not conform with this

universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)

•If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it

with this camcorder (p. 212). However, formatting erases all information on the

“Memory Stick.”

•“Memory Stick” and

are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

•All other product names mentioned here may be the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies.

“TM” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

127

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”

(1) Slide the MEMORY OPEN in the direction of the arrow to open the “Memory

Stick” slot.

(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the

B mark facing up as illustrated. Close the “Memory Stick” slot.

Access lamp

MEMORY OPEN

“Memory Stick” slot

B mark

Eje ct in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”

Press MEMORY EJECT once lightly to eject it.

MEMORY EJECT

While the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data

from the “Memory Stick” or recording the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the

power off, eject the “Memory Stick.” Otherwise, image data may become damaged.

If “

MEMORYSTICK ERROR” is displayed

Reinsert the “Memory Stick” a few times. The “Memory Stick” may be damaged if the

indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another “Memory Stick.”

128

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

Usin g a t o u ch p a n e l

Most operation buttons for use of a “Memory Stick” are displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV950

only) to operate each function.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. Operation buttons appear on the LCD

screen. You can switch the memory playback/ memory camera by pressing

PLAY/ CAM.

(3) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.

(4) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.

(5) Press PAGE3 to go to PAGE3. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.

(6) Press a desired operation item.

Refer to relevant pages for each function.

3~6

POWER

LOCK

MEMORY/

NETWORK

In the memory camera

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT

SELF

TIMER

SPOT PLAY INDEX SPOT

FOCUS

METER

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT

LCD

BRT

PLAY INDEX

MEM

M I X

In the memory

camera

In the memory

playback (still

image)

PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT

SLIDE PLAY INDEX

SHOW

9PIC

PLAY INDEX

–

CAM INDEX

129

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To e xe cu t e se t t in g s

Press

OK.

To ca n ce l se t t in g s

Press

OFF to return to PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3.

Notes

•When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the

LCD screen from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index

finger.

•Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the supplied

stylus. (DCR-TRV950 only)

•Do not press the LCD screen too hard.

•Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.

•If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You

can control the display with DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder.

•When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is

required (CALIBRATION) (p. 238).

•When the LCD screen gets dirty, clean it with the supplied cleaning cloth.

When executing each item

The green bar appears above the item.

If the items are not available

The color of the items changes to gray.

Press FN to display the follow ing buttons:

In the memory camera

PAGE1

PAGE2

PAGE3

SELFTIMER, SPOT FOCUS, PLAY, INDEX, SPOT METER

LCD BRT, PLAY, INDEX, MEM MIX

SLIDE SHOW, PLAY, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT

In the memory playback

–

PAGE1

PAGE2

PAGE3

PB ZOOM, CAM, INDEX, DELETE,

–

LCD BRT, CAM, INDEX,

–

SLIDE SHOW, CAM, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT,

130

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y

You can select the image quality in still image recording. The default setting is SUPER

FINE.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET in

with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial

(p. 211).

(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY , then press the dial.

(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality , then press

the dial.

POWER

LOCK

MEMORY/

NETWORK

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

QUALITY

IMAGESIZE FINE

RETURN STANDARD

SUPER FINE

REMAIN

[

] :

MENU END

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

QUALITY

STANDARD

IMAGESIZE

RETURN

REMAIN

[

] :

MENU END

131

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

Im a g e q u a lit y se t t in g s

Setting

Meaning

SUPER FINE (SFN)

This is the highest image quality in your camcorder.

The number of still images you can record is less than

in FINE mode. Super fine images are compressed to

about 1/3.

FINE (FINE)

Use this mode when you want to record high quality

images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/6.

STANDARD (STD)

This is the standard image quality in your camcorder.

Standard images are compressed to about 1/10.

Note

In some cases, changing the image quality may not affect the image quality, depending

on the type of images you are shooting.

Differences in image quality

Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The

memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality

and image size. Details are shown in the table below. (You can select 1152 × 864 or 640 ×

480 image size in the menu settings.)

1152 × 864 image size

Image quality

SUPER FINE

FINE

Memory capacity

About 600 KB

About 300 KB

About 200 KB

STANDARD

640 × 480 image size

Image quality

SUPER FINE

FINE

Memory capacity

About 190 KB

About 100 KB

About 60 KB

STANDARD

Image quality indicator

The image quality indicator is not displayed during playback.

When you select image quality

The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on

the screen.

132

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

Se le ct in g t h e im a g e size

You can select either of two image sizes

Still images:

1152 × 864 or 640 × 480. (When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA

or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.)

The default setting is 1152 × 864.

Moving pictures: 320 × 240 or 160 × 112

The default setting is 320 × 240.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET (still

image) or MOVIE SET (moving picture) in

, then press the dial (p. 211).

(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.

(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the

dial.

The indicator changes as follows:

Still images:

1152

320

640

160

Moving pictures:

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

POWER

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

1152

MEMORY SET

MOVIE SET

320

LOCK

IMAGESIZE 320 × 240

REMAIN 160 × 112

RETURN

QUALITY

IMAGESIZE 1152 × 864

RETURN

640 × 480

MEMORY/

NETWORK

REMAIN

1min

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

MEMORY SET

MOVIE SET

IMAGESIZE 160 × 112

QUALITY

REMAIN

IMAGESIZE 640 × 480

RETURN

REMAIN

5min

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

133

Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n

Im a g e size se t t in g s

Setting

Meaning

Indicator

1152

640

1152 × 864

Records 1152 × 864 still images.

640 × 480

320 × 240

160 × 112

Records 640 × 480 still images.

Records 320 × 240 moving pictures.

Records 160 × 112 moving pictures.

320

160

Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s yo u ca n re co rd o n a

“ Me m o ry St ick”

The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality and

image size you select and the complexity of the subject.

Type of the “Memory Stick”

Image quality Image size

8MB

16MB

32MB

64MB

128MB

(supplied)

(optional)

1152 × 864 12 images

640 × 480 40 images

1152 × 864 25 images

25 images

51 images 100 images 205 images

SUPER FINE

FINE

80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images

50 images 100 images 205 images 415 images

640 × 480 80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images 1310 images

1152 × 864 37 images 74 images 150 images 300 images 600 images

640 × 480 120 images 240 images 485 images 980 images 1970 images

STANDARD

Ap p ro xim a t e t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s yo u ca n re co rd o n a

“ Me m o ry St ick”

The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you

select and the complexity of the subject.

Type of the “Memory Stick”

Image size

8MB

16MB

32MB

64MB

128MB

(supplied)

(optional)

1 min.

20 sec.

2 min.

40 sec.

5 min.

20 sec.

10 min.

40 sec.

21 min.

20 sec.

320 × 240

5 min.

20 sec.

10 min.

40 sec.

21 min.

20 sec.

42 min.

40 sec.

85 min.

20 sec.

160 × 112

The table above shows approximate number and times of still images and moving

pictures you can record on a “Memory Stick” formatted by your camcorder.

Note

When still images recorded on your camcorder in 1152 × 864 size are played back on

other equipment that does not support 1152 × 864 size, the full image may not appear,

or images in the reduced size may appear in the center of the screen.

134

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry

St ick” – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

You can record still images on a “Memory Stick.”

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press PHOTO lightly. The green z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The

brightness of the image and focus are adjusted, being targeted for the middle

of the image and are fixed. Recording does not start yet.

(3) Press PHOTO deeper.

The still image will be displayed after the shutter sounds.

Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the

“Memory Stick.”

[a ][b ]

SFN

1 / 12

1152

PLAY INDEX

SFN

1152

POWER

PLAY INDEX

LOCK

MEMORY/

NETWORK

[a ]: Number of recorded images

[b ]: Approximate number of images can be

recorded on the “Memory Stick”

Yo u ca n re co rd st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” in t h e t a p e

re co rd in g o r re co rd in g st a n d b y

For the details, see p. 46.

135

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

The following functions do not work:

– Digital zoom

– Wide mode

– Fader

– Picture effect

– Digital effect

– Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)

– Title

While you are recording a still image

You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press

the button.

When you press PHOTO lightly in step 2

The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.

Recording data

The recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed

while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the “Memory Stick.”

To display the recording data, press the DATA CODE button during playback. You can

also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 41).

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER

switch is set to CAMERA.

136

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

Re co rd in g im a g e s co n t in u o u sly

You can record still images continuously. Before recording, select one of the four modes

described below in the menu settings.

NORMAL [a ]

Your camcorder shoots up to four still images in 1152 × 864 size or 13 still images in 640

× 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals. (

)

EXP BRKTG (Exposure Bracketing)

Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different

exposures. (

)

MULTI SCRN (Multi Screen) [b ]

Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.4 sec intervals and displays the

images on a single page divided into nine boxes. Still images are recorded in 640 × 480

size. (

)

[a]

[b]

137

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press MENU, then select BURST while STILL SET is selected in

, then press

the dial (p. 211).

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the

dial.

(4) Press MENU to make the menu setting disappear.

(5) Press PHOTO deeper.

PHOTO

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

OFF

QUALITY

NORMAL

IMAGESIZE

RETURN

IMAGESIZE EXP BRKTG

RETURN

MULTI SCRN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

BURST

QUALITY

IMAGESIZE

RETURN

OFF

NORMAL

QUALITY

IMAGESIZE EXP BRKTG

RETURN

MULTI SCRN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

If t h e ca p a cit y o f t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” b e co m e s fu ll

”

FULL” appears on the screen, and you cannot record a still image on this “Memory

Stick.”

The number of still images in continuous shooting

The number of still images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image

size and the capacity of the “Memory Stick.”

During recording still images continuously

The flash does not work.

The effect of exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG)

The effect may not appear clearly on the LCD screen.

Checking images on a TV monitor or computer display for the expected effect is

recommended.

When selecting NORMAL

Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images during pressing

PHOTO deeper. Release PHOTO to stop recording.

When shooting w ith the self-timer or the Remote Commander

Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still

images.

138

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

If there is space remaining on the “Memory Stick” for less than three photos

You cannot carry out the exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG). “

when you press PHOTO.

FULL” is displayed

Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh

The flash automatically pops up to strobe. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To

change the flash mode, press (flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator

appears on the screen.

(flash)

Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:

t (no indicator)

Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye

phenomenon.

Forced flash:

No flash:

The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness.

The flash does not fire.

The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change

FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 208). Try recording

various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.

139

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

Notes

•The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 0.8 m to 2.5 m (2 3/5

feet to 8 1/3 feet).

•Attaching the lens hood or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light from the

flash or cause lens shadow to appear.

•You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.

•

(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on

individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-

recording flash or other conditions.

•The flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright

location.

•If it is not easy to focus on a subject automatically, for example, when recording in the

dark, use HOLOGRAM AF (p. 141) or the focal distance information (p. 77) for

focusing manually.

When the flashlight does not reach to the subjects

The color of the image may change.

If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after removing the pow er

supply

Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).

The flash does not fire even if you select auto and

during the follow ing operations:

– Spot light

(auto red-eye reduction)

– Shutter speed adjustment

– Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE

– Landscape of PROGRAM AE

– Exposure

– Flexible Spot meter

When you use an external flash (optional) w hich does not have the auto red-eye

reduction

You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction.

During recording images continuously

The flash does not work.

140

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

Sh o o t in g w it h a n a u xilia ry lig h t – HOLOGRAM AF

The HOLOGRAM AF is an auxiliary light source used for focusing on subjects in dark

places.

Set HOLOGRAM F in

to AUTO in the menu settings. (The default setting is AUTO.)

When appears on the screen in a dark place, press PHOTO lightly. Then the

auxiliary light will automatically emit until the subject is focused.

HOLOGRAM AF emitter

Ab o u t HOLOGRAM AF

“HOLOGRAM AF (Auto-Focus),” an application of laser holograms, is a new AF

optical system that enables still image shooting in dark places. Having gentler radiation

than conventional high-brightness LEDs or lamps, the system satisfies Laser Class 1 (*)

specification and thus maintains higher safety for human eyes.

No safety problems will be caused by directly looking into the HOLOGRAM AF emitter

at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience

such effects like several minutes of image residual and dazzling, that you encounter

after looking into a flashlight.

* HOLOGRAM AF satisfies Class 1(time base 30 000 seconds), specified in all of JIS

(Japan), IEC(EU), and FDA(US) industry standards.

Complying with these standards identifies the laser product to be safe, under a

condition that a human looks at the laser light either directly or even through a lens

for 30 000 seconds.

141

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

Notes

•Attaching the lens hood or a conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the

HOLOGRAM AF light and make focusing difficult. We recommend removing the lens

hood or a conversion lens while shooting with the HOLOGRAM AF.

•If enough light does not reach the subject even if the HOLOGRAM AF emitter is

emitted (recommended shooting distance is 2.5 m (8 1/3 feet)), the subject will not be

focused.

•Focusing may be hampered if the light emitted from the HOLOGRAM AF is blocked

by an obstruction.

•Focus is achieved as long as HOLOGRAM AF light reaches to the subject even if its

light is slightly out of the middle position of the subject.

•If HOLOGRAM AF light is dim, it sometimes becomes difficult to focus. If this

happens, wipe the HOLOGRAM AF emitter with a soft, dry cloth.

The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit w hen:

– Flash is set to

– Focus manually

– Spot Focus

No flash

– Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE

– Landscape of PROGRAM AE

– Continuous photo recording

When you use the external flash (optional) as w ell

HOLOGRAM AF emits.

142

Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g

Se lf-t im e r m e m o ry p h o t o re co rd in g

You can record images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. You can also use the

Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.

(3) Press SELFTIMER.

The

(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.

(4) Press PHOTO deeper.

Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of

the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

PHOTO

To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r

Press SELFTIMER so that the

cannot stop the countdown.

(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You

Note

The self-timer is automatically canceled when:

– Self-timer recording is finished.

– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

143

Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill

im a g e s

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still

image on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data

through the input connector and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.”

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” and the recorded tape into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press N. Moving pictures recorded on the tape are played back.

(3) Press PHOTO lightly until the picture you want to capture from the tape

freezes and CAPTURE appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet.

To change from the selected image to another image, release PHOTO once and

press it lightly again.

(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on

the “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator

disappears.

REW

PLAY

[a] [b]

SFN

1 / 12

CAPTURE

640

PHOTO

INDEX

[a] : Number of the recorded images

[b] : Approximate number of the images that can be recorded on the “Memory Stick”

144

Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s

Image size of still images

Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject the “Memory

Stick.” Otherwise, image data may become damaged.

If “

FORMAT ERROR” appears on the screen

The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format

does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick.”

If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback

Your camcorder stops momentarily.

Sound recorded on a tape

You cannot record audio from a tape.

Titles already recorded on cassettes

You cannot record titles on a “Memory Stick.” Titles do not appear while you are

recording a still image with PHOTO.

Recording date/time

The recording data (date/time) when it is recorded on a “Memory Stick” is recorded.

Various settings are not recorded.

Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a “Memory Stick.”

When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander

Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press

the button.

145

Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s

Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t

Before operation

Set DISPLAY in

to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.

The image of the external equipment is displayed on the screen.

(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 144.

Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le

AUDIO/

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

Yellow

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

VCR

: Signal flow

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video jack on the VCR or

the TV.

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack

Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).

With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V

connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the

TV or VCR.

146

Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s

Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le

DV OUT

: Signal flow

i.LINK cable (optional)

Note

In the following instances, recording is interrupted or “

REC ERROR” is displayed,

and recording is not possible. Reinsert the “Memory Stick” to record distortion-free

images.

– When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has

been repeatedly used for dubbing.

– When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception

when a TV tuner unit is in use.

147

Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e

“ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e

– MEMORY MIX

You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the “Memory Stick” on the

moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape

or a “Memory Stick.” (However, you can record only superimposed still images on the

“Memory Stick.”)

M. CHROM (memory chroma key)

You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a

moving picture.

M. LUMI (memory luminance key)

You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title

with a moving picture. Record a title on the “Memory Stick” before a trip or event for

convenience.

C. CHROM (camera chroma key)

You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image can be used as

background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving

picture will be swapped with a still image.

M. OVERLAP* (memory overlap)

You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the “Memory

Stick.”

Still image

Moving picture

M. CHROM

CAM

CHROM

Blue

Still image

Moving picture

Blue

M. LUMI

CAM

L UM I

Still image

C. CHROM

CAM

CHROM

Moving picture

M. OVERLAP*

OV ER –

L A P

* The superimposed image using Memory overlap can be recorded on tapes only.

148

Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e

– MEMORY MIX

Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a t a p e

Before operation

•Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.

•Insert a “Memory Stick” recorded still images into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.

(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the

lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.

(4) Press –/+ on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which

you want to superimpose.

– : To see the previous image

+: To see the next image

(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.

(6) Press –/+ on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press

OK to return to PAGE1.

M. CHROM:

M. LUMI:

Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a

still image and superimpose it on a moving image

Brightness level used when extracting a still image and

superimposing it on a moving image

C. CHROM:

Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a

moving picture and superimpose it on a still image

M. OVERLAP: No adjustment necessary

The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.

(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.

(8) Press START/STOP to start recording.

149

Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e

– MEMORY MIX

POWER

MEMORY/

NETWORK

MEM MIX

OFF MCCAM OVER-

LUMI

LAP

MEM

MIX

CAMCM MCCAM

CHROM CHROM

Still image

–

100–0001

–

MEM MIX

OFF

M. LUMI

100–0001

–

MEM MIX

OFF

M. LUMI

100–0001

–

To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d

Press –/ + on the right lower corner before step 6.

To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX

Press

OFF to return to PAGE1.

Notes

• You cannot use the MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a “Memory

Stick.”

• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of

the picture may not be clear.

• You cannot change the mode setting. Press

OFF to return to PAGE1.

Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment

You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.

When you record the still image w ithout superimposing

Select M. LUMI. mode. Press <-/ + mark> until all bars are displayed. Only the still

image will be displayed on the screen.

When you select M. OVERLAP

You cannot change the still image or the mode setting.

To record the superimposed image as a still image

Press PHOTO deeper in step 8 (You should set PHOTO REC in

menu settings beforehand).

to TAPE in the

150

Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e

– MEMORY MIX

Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” a s a st ill

im a g e

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” recorded still images into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press FN and select PAGE2.

(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the

lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.

(4) Press –/+ on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which

you want to superimpose.

– : To see the previous image

+: To see the next image

(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.

(6) Press –/+ on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press

OK to return to PAGE2.

M. CHROM:

M. LUMI:

Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a

still image and superimpose it on a moving image

Brightness level used when extracting a still image and

superimposing it on a moving image

C. CHROM:

Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a

moving picture and superimpose it on a still image

The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.

(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.

(8) Press PHOTO deeper to start recording.

The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”

Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

151

Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e

– MEMORY MIX

PHOTO

MEM MIX

OFF MCCAM

LUMI

CAMCM MCCAM

CHROM CHROM

Still image

–

100–0001

–

MEM MIX

OFF

M. LUMI

100–0001

–

MEM MIX

OFF

M. LUMI

100–0001

–

To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d

Press –/+ on the right lower corner before step 6.

To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX

Press

OFF to return to PAGE2.

Notes

•You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.”

•When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of

the picture may not be clear.

•You cannot change the mode setting. Press

OFF to return to PAGE2.

Image size of still pictures

Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.

Image data modified w ith your computers or shot w ith other equipment

You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.

When recording images on a “Memory Stick” using the MEMORY MIX

The PROGRAM AE does not work. (The indicator flashes.)

The “Memory Stick” supplied w ith your camcorder stores 20 images

– For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001~100-0018

– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 100-0019~100-0020

Sample images

Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are

protected (p. 176).

152

Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry

St ick” – MPEG m o vie re co rd in g

You can record moving pictures with sound on a “Memory Stick.”

You can record picture and sound continuously up to the capacity of a “Memory

Stick”(MPEG MOVIE EX).

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording

lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. The picture and sound

are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.” For more

information about recording time, see page 134.

40min

₃₂₀REC

0:00 03

POWER

15min

[a ]

BBB

[b ]

MEMORY/

NETWORK

PLAY INDEX

[a ]: Recording time can be recorded on the

“Memory Stick”.

[b ]: This indicator is displayed for five seconds

after pressing START/ STOP. This indicator

is not recorded.

To st o p re co rd in g

Press START/ STOP.

153

Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g

Note

Sound is recorded in monaural.

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

The following functions do not work:

– Digital zoom

– Wide mode

– Fader

– Picture effect

– Digital effect

– Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)

– Title

When using an external flash (optional)

Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on a “Memory

Stick.” Otherwise, the charging sound for the flash may be recorded.

Recording date/time

The date/time are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically

recorded onto the “Memory Stick.”

To display the recording date/time, press the DATA CODE button during playback.

You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 41). Various settings

cannot be recorded.

During recording on a “Memory Stick”

Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting the tape, sound is

recorded on the “Memory Stick.”

When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER

switch is set to CAMERA.

154

Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g

Se lf-t im e r MPEG m o vie re co rd in g

You can record images on a “Memory Stick” with the self-timer. You can also use the

Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.

(3) Press SELFTIMER.

The

(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.

(4) Press START/ STOP.

Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of

the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

START/STOP button

POWER

MEMORY/

NETWORK

To st o p t h e se lf-t im e r

Press START/ STOP. To restart the self-timer, press START/ STOP again.

To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r

Press SELFTIMER so that the

(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen.

Note

The self-timer is automatically canceled when:

– Self-timer recording is finished.

– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.

155

Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a

m o vin g p ict u re

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a

moving picture on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also capture moving picture

data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a “Memory

Stick.”

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” and the recorded tape into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.

And press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.

(3) Press START/ STOP on your camcorder. The picture and sound are recorded

up to the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick.” For more information

about recording time, see page 134.

40min

0 15 42 43

POWER

₃₂₀REC 0:00 03

15min

[a ]

BBB

[b ]

MEMORY/

NETWORK

INDEX

[a ]: The recording time can be recorded on

the “Memory Stick.”

[b ]: This indicator is displayed for

five seconds after pressing START/

STOP. This indicator is not recorded.

PLAY

PAUSE

To st o p re co rd in g

Press START/ STOP.

156

Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re

Notes

•Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording images from

a tape to a “Memory Stick.”

•Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from a tape.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or knock the unit. Also, do not turn the power off, eject the “Memory

Stick.” Otherwise, image data may become damaged.

Titles already recorded on cassettes

You cannot record titles on a “Memory Stick.” Titles do not appear while you are

recording moving picture with START/STOP.

If “

AUDIO ERROR” is displayed

Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/V

connecting cable to input images from external equipment used to play back the image

(p. 158).

Recording date/time

The recording data (date/time) when it is recorded on a “Memory Stick” is recorded.

Various settings are not recorded.

Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a “Memory Stick.”

157

Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re

Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t

Before operation

Set DISPLAY in

to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.

The image of the other equipment is displayed on the screen.

(3) Follow the procedure on page 156 from the step 3 onwards at the point where

you want to start recording from.

Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le

AUDIO/

VIDEO

OUT

Yellow

S VIDEO

White

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO

VCR

: Signal flow

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

Red

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack

Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).

With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V

connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the

TV or VCR.

158

Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re

Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le

DV OUT

: Signal flow

i.LINK cable (optional)

Note

In the following instances, “

pictures.

REC ERROR” is displayed and you cannot record

– When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has

been repeatedly used for dubbing.

– When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception

when a TV tuner unit is in use.

– When the input signal is cut off.

159

Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s

a m o vin g p ict u re – Dig it a l p ro g ra m

e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )

You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a “Memory Stick.”

Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” and a recorded tape into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set VIDEO EDIT in

to MEMORY, then press the dial (p.217).

(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE and select the desired

image size, then press the dial.

(4) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video

operation buttons, then pause playback.

You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.

(5) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to

select MARK, then press the dial.

The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark

changes to light blue.

(6) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video

operation buttons, then pause playback.

You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.

(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.

The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program

mark changes to light blue.

(8) Repeat steps 4 to 7, then set the program.

When one program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.

You can set 20 programs in maximum.

REW

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE

4,6

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

N X 0 08 55 06

OUT

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

N X 0 08 58 06

VIDEO EDIT

MARK

N X 0 10 01 23

UNDO

ERASE ALL

START

IMAGESIZE

ERASE ALL

START

IMAGESIZE

ERASE ALL

START

IMAGESIZE

TOTAL 0 00 00

SCENE

TOTAL 0 00 12

SCENE

TOTAL 0 00 31

SCENE

2min

320

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

160

Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re

– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )

Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t

Erase OUT first and then IN of the last program.

(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.

(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.

To cancel erasing

Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.

Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s

(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then press the dial.

(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.

To cancel erasing all programs

Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.

To cancel a program you have set

Press MENU.

The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.

Notes

• You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.

• You cannot operate recording during the digital program editing on a “Memory

Stick.”

If the tape has a blank portion

You cannot set IN or OUT on the portion

If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape

The total time may not be displayed correctly.

During making a program

If you eject the cassette, the program will be erased.

161

Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re

– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )

Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the dial.

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.

The program mark flashes.

The SEARCH indicator appears during search and the EDITING indicator

appears during writing of data on your camcorder, and REC appears during

dubbing on the screen.

The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.

When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.

To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g

Press x using the video operation buttons.

The program you made is recorded on a “Memory Stick” up to the place where you

pressed x.

To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g

Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO

EDIT in the menu settings.

Press MENU to erase the menu display.

When the program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.

You cannot press START.

When the “Memory Stick” does not have enough space to record

“LOW MEMORY ” appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures up to the

time indicated.

When the “Memory Stick” has no space to record

“MEMORY FULL” appears on the screen.

When a “Memory Stick” is not set

“NO MEMORY STICK” appears on the screen.

When the w rite-protect sw itch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

“MEMORY STICK LOCKED” appears on the screen.

162

Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e

– PHOTO SAVE

Using the search function, you can automatically capture only still images from tapes

and record them on a “Memory Stick” in sequence.

Before operation

•Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.

•Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE in

, then press the dial (p. 212).

PHOTO BUTTON appears on the screen.

(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image from the tape is recorded on the

“Memory Stick.” The number of still images copied is displayed. END is

displayed when copying ends.

PHOTO SAVE

0 00 00 00

PHOTO SAVE

0 30 00 00

4/15

₆₄₀STD

8/15

₆₄₀STD

PHOTO

SAVING

END

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

MEMORY SET

PHOTO SAVE

0 00 00 00

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

PHOTO SAVE

FILE NO.

4/15

₆₄₀STD

READY

RETURN

PHOTO BUTTON

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

[

] :

PHOTO START MENU END

To st o p co p yin g

Press x using the video operation buttons or press MENU.

Wh e n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” b e co m e s fu ll

“MEMORY FULL” appears on the screen, and copying stops. Insert another “Memory

Stick” and repeat the procedure from step 2.

163

Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e – PHOTO SAVE

Image size of still images

Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing

Do not shake or knock your camcorder. As well do not turn the power off, eject the

“Memory Stick.” Otherwise, image data may become damaged.

If the w rite-protect sw itch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

“NOT READY” appears when you select the item in the menu settings.

When you change the “Memory Stick” during copying

Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous

“Memory Stick.”

164

Vie w in g st ill im a g e s

– Me m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck

You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play back

six images including moving pictures in order at a time by selecting the index screen.

You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press PLAY or

PB. The last recorded image is displayed.

(3) Press –/+ on your camcorder to select the desired still image.

– : To see the previous image

+: To see the next image

PLAY

To st o p m e m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck

Press CAM, VCR on your camcorder or MEMORY PLAY button on the Remote

Commander.

165

Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck

You may not be able to play back images w ith your camcorder:

– when playing back image data modified on your computer.

– when playing back image data shot with other equipment.

Notes on the file name

•The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed

if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.

•“

- DIRECTORY ERROR” may appear on screen if the structure of the directory

does not conform to the DCF standard. While this message appears, you can play back

images but cannot record them on the “Memory Stick.”

•The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.

To play back recorded images on a TV screen

•Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable

supplied with your camcorder.

•When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, image quality

may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good

as ever.

•Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be

output from the TV speakers.

Still images

You can select still images also with –/+ on PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3.

When no still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick”

When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, “

Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck

Image size

NO FILE” appears.

Image number/Total number of recorded images

6/ 40

MEMORY PLAY

1152

100–0006

Print mark

Protect

JUL 4 2002

12:05:56 AM

Recording date/time/various settings

–

CAM INDEX

When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is

displayed instead of CAM

Data Directory Number, File Number

Recording data

You can view recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded) when you

press DATA CODE. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 41).

To make screen indicators disappear

Press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL.

166

Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck

Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )

You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when

searching for a particular image.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.

A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index

screen mode.

T : To display the previous 6 images

t : To display the following 6 images

B mark

MARK

DEL

EXIT

1 / 40

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )

Press the image you want to display.

Note

When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This

indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These

numbers are different from the data file names.

Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment

These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen.

167

Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s

– MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck

You can play back moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play

back six images including still images in order at a time by selecting the index screen.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press PLAY or

PB. The last recorded image is displayed.

(3) Press +/– to select the desired moving pictures.

– : To see the previous picture

+ : To see the next picture

(4) Press MPEG N X to start playback.

(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.

– : To turn down

+ : To turn up

When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted.

VOLUME

PLAY

To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck

Press MPEG N X.

Note

You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:

– When playing back image data modified on your computer.

– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.

To play back recorded images on a TV screen

•Before operation connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable

supplied with your camcorder.

•Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be

output from the TV speakers.

Moving pictures

You can select moving pictures also with –/+ on PAGE1/PAGE2/PAGE3.

When no image is recorded on the “Memory Stick”

When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, the message “ NO

FILE” appears.

168

Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck

Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m t h e d e sire d p a rt

The moving picture recorded on a “Memory Stick” is divided into 23 parts.

You can select every each one point and play back pictures.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press PLAY or

PB. The last recorded image is displayed.

(3) Press –/+ to select the desired moving pictures.

– : To see the previous picture

+ : To see the next picture

(4) Press </, to select the point where you want to play back.

< :To see previous part

, :To see next part

1/2

00 00

320

MOV00001

MPEG

N X

–

CAM INDEX

(5) Press MPEG N X to start playback.

To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck

Press MPEG N X

When recording time is too short

The moving picture may not be divided into 23 parts.

169

Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck

Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck

Image size

Picture number/ Total number of recorded pictures

1/20

320

MOV00001

01 00

MPEG

N X

JUL 4 2002

Protect

56AM

–

CAM INDEX

When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is

displayed instead of CAM.

Recording date/ time. (Various settings are displayed as

“– – –”.)

Data directory number/ File number

Recording date/time

To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE. You can also use the Remote

Commander for this operation. (p. 41)

To make screen indicator disappear

Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL.

170

Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry

St ick” t o a t a p e

You can copy images recorded on a “Memory Stick” and record them to a tape.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” and a tape for recording into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Using the video control buttons, search a point where you want to record the

desired images. Set the tape to playback pause.

(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.

The tape is set to the recording pause.

(4) Press

PB. The last recorded image is displayed.

(5) Press –/+ to select the desired image.

– : To see the previous image

+ : To see the next image

(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.

z appears on the screen during recording.

(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 5 and 6.

REC

PAUSE

To st o p co p yin g in t h e m id d le

Press x.

171

Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” t o a t a p e

During copying

You cannot operate the following functions:

– MEMORY PLAY

– MEMORY INDEX

– MEMORY DELETE

– MEMORY +/–

Note on the index screen

You cannot record the index screen.

If you press EDITSEARCH during pause

Memory playback stops.

Image data modified on your computers or shot w ith other equipment

You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder.

When copying movies

After step 6, press MPEG u and play back the image.

172

En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a

“ Me m o ry St ick” – Me m o ry PB ZOOM

You can enlarge still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can select and view a

desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the

enlarged still image to tapes or a “Memory Stick”.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Press

FN to display PAGE1 during the memory playback. When you set the POWER

switch to VCR, press FN and select PAGE2 during the memory playback.

(2) Press PB ZOOM. PB ZOOM screen appears.

(3) Press the area that you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen.

The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback

image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area,

the area moves to the center of the screen.

(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.

You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its

size.

W : Decreases the zoom ratio.

T : Increases the zoom ratio.

3/14

1152

PB ZOOM

× 5.0

MEMORY PLAY

100–0003

END

3/14

1152

PB ZOOM

ZOOM

MEMORY PLAY

100–0003

END

To ca n ce l PB ZOOM

Press

END.

173

En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

– Me m o ry PB ZOOM

The PB ZOOM is canceled w hen executing the follow ing operations:

– MENU

– MEMORY PLAY*

– MEMORY INDEX*

– MEMORY +/–*

* When these functions are selected by the Remote Commander.

Moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick”

The PB ZOOM does not work.

To record the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM on a “Memory Stick”

Press PHOTO to record the still image processed by PB ZOOM. (Images are recorded at

640 × 480 size.)

In the PB ZOOM mode

If you press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen

disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.

Edge of the enlarged image

The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.

To record an image processed on PB ZOOM on tapes

Follow the procedure on page 171 and execute the PB ZOOM after step 5.

174

Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s in a co n t in u o u s lo o p

– SLIDE SHOW

You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially

when checking recorded images or during a presentation.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.

(3) Press SLIDE SHOW.

(4) Press START. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the

“Memory Stick” in sequence.

SLIDE SHOW

100–00001

₁₁₅₂1 / 6

START

–

END

To st o p t h e slid e sh o w

Press

END.

To p a u se d u rin g a slid e sh o w

Press PAUSE.

To re t u rn t o FN

Press

END to return to PAGE3, then press EXIT.

To st a rt t h e slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e

Select the desired image using –/+ buttons before step 4.

To view recorded images on TV

Before operation connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable

supplied with your camcorder.

If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation

The slide show does not operate. If you change the “Memory Stick,” be sure to follow

the steps again from the beginning.

175

Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re

– Im a g e p ro t e ct io n

You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure of important images.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press INDEX on your camcorder to display the index.

(3) Press - MARK. The screen to protect the image appears.

(4) Press the image you want to protect. A “-” appears on the protected image.

INDEX

-MARK

MARK

DEL

EXIT

RET.

MARK

EXIT

3,4

MARK

1 / 40

2 / 40

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n

Press the image you want to cancel image protection in step 4 again. The “-”

disappears.

Note

Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected

image data. Before formatting a “Memory Stick,” check its contents.

If the w rite-protect sw itch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

You cannot protect images.

176

De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE

You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick.” You can delete all images or only

selected images.

De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Play back the image you want to delete.

(3) Press FN to display PAGE1.

(4) Press DELETE. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen.

(5) Press OK. The selected image is deleted.

3 / 40

DELETE

100–00003

1152

DELETE?

DELE–

CAN–

CEL

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e

Press CANCEL in step 5.

Notes

•To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.

•Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully

check the image.

If the w rite-protect sw itch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

You cannot delete images.

177

De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE

De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s o n t h e in d e x scre e n

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.

(3) Press DEL. Then press the images you want to delete. The number of the

selected image is highlighted.

(4) Press EXEC. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen.

(5) Press OK. The selected images are deleted.

INDEX

MARK

DEL

EXIT

RET.

DEL

EXEC

EXIT

DEL

1 / 40

3 / 40

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e

Press CANCEL in step 5.

178

De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE

De le t in g a ll im a g e s

You can delete all unprotected images in the “Memory Stick.”

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL in

, then press the dial (p. 212).

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes

to EXECUTE.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.

DELETING flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are deleted,

COMPLETE is displayed.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

FILE NO.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

FILE NO.

DELETE ALL READY

FORMAT

DELETE ALL RETURN

FORMAT

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

FILE NO.

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

FILE NO.

DELETE ALL RETURN

FORMAT

RETURN

FORMAT

RETURN

EXECUTE

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

FILE NO.

DELETE ALL DELETING

FORMAT

RETURN

MEMORY SET

STILL SET

MOVIE SET

FILE NO.

DELETE ALL COMPLETE

FORMAT

RETURN

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”

Select RETURN in step 3 or 4.

While DELETING appears

Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.

179

Writ in g a p rin t m a rk – PRINT MARK

You can specify a recorded still image to print out by writing a print mark. This

function is useful for printing out still images later.

Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for

specifying still images to print out.

Before operation

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only) or VCR.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.

(3) Press

MARK. The screen used to write a print mark appears.

(4) Press the image for which you want to write a print mark. A “

” appears on

the selected image.

INDEX

-MARK

MARK

DEL

EXIT

RET.

MARK

EXIT

3,4

MARK

1 / 40

2 / 40

To re t u rn t o FN

Press EXIT.

To ca n ce l w rit in g p rin t m a rks

Press the image for which you want to cancel the print mark set in step 4 again. The

disappears.

If the w rite-protect sw itch on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK

You cannot write print marks on still images.

Moving pictures

You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.

180

Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r

You can use the optional printer on your camcorder to print images on print paper.

For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.

There are various ways of printing still images. The following describes the setup for

printing with the DATE/ DAY & TIME information superimposed and the print setup

required to select 9PIC PRINT.

Before operation

• Insert a recorded “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

• Attach the optional printer to your camcorder as illustrated.

Printer

F N

In se rt in g DATE/DAY & TIME

You can print the recorded DATE/ DAY & TIME data on the print paper.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DATE/ TIME in

, then press the dial (p. 213).

(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.

DATE

DAY & TIME

4 12 00AM

JUL 4 2002

181

Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r

Se le ct in g 9PIC PRINT

You can make 9 stickers on a single sheet when you print images recorded on a

“Memory Stick” in 9PIC PRINT.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only). Make

sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.

(3) Press 9PIC PRINT.

(4) Press the desired mode.

SAME PICS

MULTI PICS or MARKED PICS*

* Nine still images with print marks are printed together.

Moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick”

You cannot print moving pictures. When there are no files other than moving pictures,

“

NO STILL IMAGE FILE” appears on the screen.

When the “Memory Stick” has no files

NO FILE” appears on the screen.

“

When there are no files w ith a PRINT MARK

NO PRINT MARK” appears on the screen.

“

Images processed by 9PIC PRINT

You cannot insert a DATE/TIME indicator.

Images recorded in the MULTI SCRN

You can print images recorded in the multi screen mode on sticker type print paper.

However, each frame cannot be properly adjusted to the frames on the print paper.

182

— Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g yo u r Co m p u t e r —

Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– In t ro d u ct io n

There are the following ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer in order to

view images saved on the “Memory Stick” or recorded on the tape on your computer.

To view images on a computer which has a “Memory Stick” slot, first remove the

“Memory Stick” from the camcorder and then insert it into the computer’s “Memory

Stick” slot.

Camcorder

Connection jack

Connection

cable

Computer environment

requirements

USB cable

(supplied)

USB connector,

editing software

USB jack

Tape stills and

movies

i.LINK

(DV Interface)

i.LINK cable

(optional)

DV connector,

editing software

“Memory Stick”

stills and movies

USB cable

(supplied)

USB connector,

editing software

USB jack

When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the

USB driver before connecting the camcorder to the computer. If you connect

the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not be able to install the USB

driver correctly.

For details about your computer’s connectors and editing software, contact the

computer manufacturer.

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e

Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck

For more information, see page 186.

(USB) jack

USB connector

Push into the end

USB cable (supplied)

183

Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n

Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e i.LINK (DV in t e rfa ce )

Your computer must have a DV connector and editing software installed that can read

video signals.

DV connector

is marked on this side

i.LINK cable (optional)

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck

There are two methods of USB connection, NORMAL and PTP. The default setting is

NORMAL. Here we explain how to use the camcorder with a standard USB connection

(NORMAL).

See page 186 when using Windows and page 201 when using Macintosh.

(USB) jack

USB connector

USB cable (supplied)

You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/Writer (optional).

Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB ja ck

Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for a Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for a

Memory Stick.

When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended

operating environment.

184

Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n

No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r

“ Me m o ry St ick”

•“Memory Stick” operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a “Memory Stick”

formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the “Memory Stick” in

your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was

connected.

•Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be played

back on your camcorder.

So ft w a re

•Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a

still image file.

•When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to

your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image

format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open

the file.

Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r

Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after

recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.

185

Connecting your cam corder to your com puter

using the USB cable – For Window s users

Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to

the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not

be able to install the USB driver correctly.

Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to

the computer’s USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,

along with the application software required for viewing images.

If you connect your camcorder and your computer using the USB cable, you can view

pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on a tape on your computer

(USB streaming function).

Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to your computer, you

can process or edit them in image processing software and append them to e-mail.

You can view images recorded on the “Memory Stick” on your computer.

Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g

via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t a p e im a g e s o n t h e co m p u t e r

OS:

Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP

Home Edition or Windows XP Professional

Standard installation is required.

However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.

You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still

images.

CPU:

Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)

Application:

DirectX 8.0a or later

Sound system:

16 bit stereo sound card and speakers

Memory:

64 MB or more

Hard disk:

Available memory required for installation:

at least 200MB

Available hard disc memory recommended:

at least 1GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)

Display:

4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot High color (16 bit color, 65,000 colors),

Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this

product will not operate correctly.)

Others:

This product is compatible with DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.

The USB connector must be provided as standard.

You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.

186

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g

via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g “ Me m o ry St ick” im a g e s o n t h e

co m p u t e r

OS:

Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,

Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional

Standard installation is required.

However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.

CPU:

MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster

The USB connector must be provided as standard.

Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).

Notes

•Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or

more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.

•Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is

used simultaneously.

•Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments

mentioned above.

•Windows and Windows Media are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

•Pentium is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

•All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not

mentioned in each case in this manual.

187

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r

Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to your

computer.

Connect the USB cable according to “Making the computer recognize the

camcorder.”

If you are using Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Home Edition/

Professional, log in with permission of Administrators.

(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.

(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The

application software starts up and the title screen appears.

(3) Move the cursor to “USB Driver” and click. This starts USB driver installation.

(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.

(5) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, in accordance with the

instructions on the screen.

Note

If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver

will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again in accordance with the steps

on page 191.

Window s XP Home Edition/Professional users

If you go to “USB CONNECT” in the menu settings and select “PTP,” you can copy

“Memory Stick” images from the camcorder onto your computer without installing the

USB driver. This is ideal for simply copying images from a camcorder onto a computer.

Refer to page 215 for details.

188

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e

Refer to page 190 for details on viewing “Memory Stick” images on your computer.

You need to install “PIXELA ImageMixer ” to view images recorded on a tape on your

computer. Install it from the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.

To install and use this software in Windows 2000 Professional. You must be authorized

as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, you

must be authorized as Administrators.

(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.

If you are using your computer, close all running applications.

(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

The application software starts up and the title screen appears. If the title

screen does not appear, double-click “My Computer” and then “ImageMixer”

(CD-ROM Drive). The application software screen appears after a while.

(3) Move the cursor to “PIXELA ImageMixer” and click.

The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Select Settings Language”

screen appears.

(4) Select the language for installation.

(5) Follow the on-screen messages.

The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.

(6) Click DirectX

Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX.

Restart your computer when the installation is completed.

(7) Connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.

(8) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(9) Select USB STREAM in

to ON in the menu settings (p. 215).

(10) With the CD-ROM inserted, connect the USB jacks of the camcorder and

computer using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.

Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard

starts.

(USB) jack

USB connector

Push into the end

USB cable (supplied)

(continued on the following page)

189

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

(11) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes

that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts

three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow

the installation to complete without interrupting it.

For Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional users

(12) After the “File Needed” screen appears.

Open “Browse...” t “My Computer” t “ImageMixer” t “Sonyhcb.sys”,

and click “OK.”

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

Set USBCONNECT in

to NORMAL.)

to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is set

(1) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

(2) Connect the AC power adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/

NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your

computer using the supplied USB cable.

USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. Your computer

recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.

(USB) jack

USB connector

Push into the end

USB cable (supplied)

(4) Follow the on-screen messages to make the Add Hardware Wizard recognize

that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts

two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow

each installation to complete without interrupting it.

You cannot install the USB driver if a “Memory Stick” is not in your camcorder.

Be sure to insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder before installing the USB

driver.

190

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r

The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your

camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following

procedure to correctly install the USB driver.

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e

Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver

1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.

2 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.

3 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your

camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.

4 Open your computer’s “Device Manager.”

Window s XP Home Edition/Professional:

Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and click the

“Device manager” button.

If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel,”

click “Switch to classic view” instead.

Window s 2000 Professional:

Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab,

and click the “Device Manager” button.

Window s 98 SE/Window s Me:

Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device

Manager.”

(continued on the following page)

191

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

5 Select and delete the underlined devices below.

Window s 98SE

Window s Me

Window s 2000 Professional

Window s XP Home Edition/Professional

192

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then

disconnect the USB cable.

7 Restart your computer.

Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM

Perform the entire procedure described in “Installing the USB driver” on page 188.

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”

Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver

1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.

2 Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.

3 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/

NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

4 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your

camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.

5 Open your computer’s “Device Manager.”

Window s 2000 Professional:

Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware,” and

click the “Device Manager” button.

Other OS:

Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System,” and click “Device

Manager.”

6 Select “Other devices.”

Select the device prefixed with the “?” mark and delete.

Ex: (?)Sony Handycam

7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then

disconnect the USB cable.

8 Restart your computer.

Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM

Perform the entire procedure described in “Installing the USB driver” on page 188.

193

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n

yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h “ PIXELA Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”

You need to install the USB driver and “PIXELA ImageMixer” to view taped images on

your computer (p. 188).

To install and use the software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized

as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, you

must be authorized as Administrators.

View ing images recorded on a tape

(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.

(2) Connect the AC power adaptor, and insert a tape into your camcorder.

(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

Select USB STREAM in

to ON in the menu settings (p. 215).

(4) Select “Start” t “Programs” t “PIXELA” t “ImageMixer” t “PIXELA

ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.”

The “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” startup screen appears on your

computer. The title screen appears.

(5) Click

on the screen.

194

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

(6) Select

Preview window

(7) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your

computer using the supplied USB cable.

(USB) jack

USB connector

Push into the end

USB cable (supplied)

(8) Press N to start playback.

The picture from the tape appears on your computer.

195

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

View ing pictures live from your camcorder

(1) Follow the steps 1, 2 on page 194.

(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

Select USB STREAM in

to ON in the menu settings (p. 215).

(3) Follow the steps 4 to 7 on page 194, 195.

The picture from your camcorder appears on the preview window on your

computer.

Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s

Preview window

Thumbnail list widow

(1) Select

(2) Looking at the preview window, move the cursor to

point you want to capture.

and press it at the

The still image on the screen is captured.

Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window.

196

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s

Preview window

Thumbnail list widow

(1) Select

(2) Look at the preview window and click on

you want to capture. changes to

(3) Look at the preview window and click on

at the first scene of the movie

at the last scene you want to

capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.

Notes

•The following may occur while using your camcorder, and are not due to any

malfunction.

– The image shakes up and down.

– Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.

– Images of different color systems to that of the camcorder are not displayed correctly.

•When your camcorder is in the standby mode with a cassette inserted, it turns off

automatically after five minutes.

•We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your

camcorder is in the standby mode, and no cassette is inserted.

•Indicators in the camcorder LCD screen do not appear on images that are captured into

your computer.

197

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection

The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your

camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver

following the procedure on page 191.

If any trouble occurs

Close all running applications, then restart your computer.

Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:

– Disconnect the USB cable.

– Change the POWER switch to the other position or set the POWER switch to OFF

(CHG) on your camcorder.

Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f “ PIXELA

Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”

A “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” on-line help site is available where you can

find the detailed operating method of “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.”

(1) Click

located in the upper-right corner of the screen.

The ImageMixer’s Manual screen appears.

(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.

To close on-line help

Click

at the top right of the screen.

If you have any questions about “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”

“PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” is a software product produced by PIXELA

corporation. For more information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM

supplied with your camcorder.

No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r

Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r

Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after

recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.

198

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry

St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

Vie w in g im a g e s

Before operation

•You need to install the USB driver to view “Memory Stick” images on your computer

(p. 188).

An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving

pictures in Windows environment.

•Set USBCONNECT in

to NORMAL.)

to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is set

(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.

(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC power

adaptor to your camcorder.

(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your

computer using the supplied USB cable.

USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.

(USB) jack

USB connector

USB cable

(5) Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly recognized

drive (Example: “Removable Disk (E:)”).

The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.

(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.

For the detailed folder and file name, see “Image file storage destinations and

image files”(p. 200).

Desired file type

Still image

Double-click in this order

“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder

“Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file*

Image file

Moving picture*

* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If

you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image and sound may

break off.

199

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs

Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s

Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders by recording mode.

The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within

the range from 0001 to 9999.

Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs

(Wh e n yo u r ca m co rd e r is re co g n ize d a s t h e d rive [E:])

Folder containing still image data

Folder containing moving picture data

Folder

File

Meaning

100MSDCF

MOML0001

DSC0ssss.JPG

MOV0ssss.MPG

Still image file

Moving picture file

Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t

t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)

– For Window s 2000 Professional/Me, Window s XP Home Edition/Professional

users

To disconnect the USB cable, eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF

(CHG) following the procedure below.

(1) Move the cursor to the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon on the Task Tray and

click to cancel the applicable drive.

(2) After the “Safe to remove” message appears, disconnect the USB cable and

eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG).

200

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r

co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs

Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck

Before connecting your camcorder to your computer, install the USB driver on the

computer. The USB driver is packaged together with application software for viewing

images on the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.

Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g

via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g “ Me m o ry St ick” im a g e s o n yo u r

co m p u t e r

Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0/9.1/9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)

Standard installation is required.

However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0/9.1 should be used for the following

models.

•iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive

•iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation

The USB connector must be provided as standard.

QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures).

Notes

•Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or

more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.

•Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is

used simultaneously.

•Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments

mentioned above.

•Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.

•All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not

mentioned in each case in this manual.

201

Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le

– Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs

In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r

Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB

driver is completed.

For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users

(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.

(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

The application software screen appears.

(3) Click the “USB Driver” to open the folder containing the six files related to

“Driver.”

(4) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.

• Sony Camcorder USB Driver

• Sony Camcorder USB Shim

(5) When the message appears, click “OK.”

The USB driver is installed on your computer.

(6) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.

(7) Restart your computer.

For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)

The USB driver need not be installed. Your Mac automatically recognizes the “Memory

Stick” as a drive just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable.

202

Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry

St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r

– Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs

Vie w in g im a g e s

Before operation

You need to install the USB driver to view “Memory Stick” images on your computer

(p. 202).

QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.

(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.

(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC power

adaptor to your camcorder.

(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only).

(4) Connect the (USB) jack on the camcorder to the USB connector on your

computer using the supplied USB cable.

USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.

(5) Double-click the “Memory Stick” icon on the desktop.

The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.

(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.

Desired file type

Still image

Double-click in this order

“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder

“Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file*

Image file

Moving picture*

* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If

you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image and sound may

break off.

Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t

t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG)

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Close all running applications.

Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.

(2) Drag the “Memory Stick” icon into the “Trash.” Alternatively, select the

“Memory Stick” icon by clicking on it, and then select “Eject disk” from the

“Special” menu at the top left of the screen.

(3) Disconnect the USB cable or eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER

switch of your camcorder to OFF (CHG).

For Mac OS X (v10.0) users

Shutting down your computer, then disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory

Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

203

Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it

o n yo u r co m p u t e r – Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n

You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to your

computer which has the i.LINK jack connected to your camcorder.

Before operation

Set DISPLAY in

to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.

(2) Press MENU, then select A/V t DV OUT in

EXEC dial (p. 210).

to ON with the SEL/PUSH

(3) Start playback on the analog video unit.

(4) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer. The

operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are

using.

For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your

computer and software you are using.

AUDIO/VIDEO

VCR

Yellow

OUT

S VIDEO

i.LINK

White

VIDEO

AUDIO

A/V connecting cable (supplied)

Red

: Signal flow

i.LINK cable (optional)

Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d

Stop capturing procedures on your computer , and stop the playback on the analog

video unit.

Notes

•You need to install software that supports the video signal exchange.

•Depending on the state of the video signals, the computer may not be able to output

the images correctly when you convert video signals into digital video signals via

your camcorder.

•You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video

tapes include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.

•You can capture images and sound with an S video cable (optional) instead of the

A/V connecting cable (supplied).

If your computer has a USB connector

You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transferred smoothly.

204

— Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n —

Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk

– DCR-TRV950 o n ly

You can access the Internet via a Bluetooth compliant device from your camcorder.

Once the access is made, you can view a Web page, send/ receive your e-mail, etc. This

section described only how to open the Network Menu.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK.

Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the further side (unlock position).

(2) Press NETWORK.

(Bluetooth) lamp lights up and Network Menu appears.

For the details, refer to the Network Function Operating Instructions supplied with

your camcorder.

NETWORK

(Bluetooth) lamp

POWER

LOCK

MEMORY/

NETWORK

205

Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk

Ho w t o h o ld yo u r ca m co rd e r w h e n o p e ra t in g in NETWORK m o d e

Hold your camcorder with your hand through the grip belt to keep from dropping it.

The operation buttons needed in NETWORK mode are displayed on the LCD screen.

Press the buttons with the supplied stylus.

Aft e r u sin g t h e st ylu s

Put it back in the holder. Hold the stylus correctly as shown in the illustration and

insert it until it clicks.

On trademarks

•The BLUETOOTH trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony

Corporation under license.

•All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not

mentioned in each case in this manual.

Note

Make sure that your camcorder is in the standby with the POWER switch set to

MEMORY/NETWORK.

During using the netw ork function

You cannot use the optional printer.

206

— Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e

m e n u

To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/

PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon,

then the menu item and then the mode.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only), then press MENU.

(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to

set.

(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to

set.

(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial

to set.

(5) If you want to change other items, select

RETURN and press the dial, then

repeat steps 2 to 4.

For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 208).

CAMERA

MEMORY/NETWORK*

VCR

MANUAL SET

EFFECT

FLASH LVL

AUTO SHTR

MANUAL SET

EFFECT

MANUAL SET

FLASH LVL

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

[

] :

MENU END

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

REMAIN

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

REMAIN

MIC LEVEL

RETURN

MIC LEVEL

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

REMAIN

MIC LEVEL

RETURN

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

REMAIN

MIC LEVEL

RETURN

AUTO

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

REMAIN

MIC LEVEL

RETURN

TAPE SET

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

REMAIN

MIC LEVEL

RETURN

AUTO

[

] :

MENU END

[

] :

MENU END

* DCR-TRV950 only

207

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

To m a ke t h e m e n u d isp la y d isa p p e a r

Press MENU.

Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:

MANUAL SET

CAMERA SET

VCR SET

LCD/VF SET

MEMORY SET

PRINT SET

CM SET

TAPE SET

SETUP MENU

OTHERS

Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m z is the default setting.

Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The screen shows

only the items you can operate at the moment.

MEMORY/NETWORK is one of the positions of the POWER switch on the DCR-

TRV950. It is referred to as MEMORY on the DCR-TRV940.

POWER

Icon/item

MANUAL SET

Mode

Meaning

sw itch

P EFFECT

——

To add special effects like those in films or on

the TV to images (p. 58, 84)

VCR

CAMERA

FLASH LVL

HIGH

Makes the flash level higher than normal.

Normal setting

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

z NORMAL

LOW

Makes the flash level lower than normal.

AUTO SHTR z ON

To automatically activate the electronic shutter

when shooting in bright conditions

CAMERA

OFF

To not automatically activate the electronic

shutter even when shooting in bright conditions

Note on FLASH LVL

You cannot adjust FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not compatible with the

flash level.

208

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

CAMERA SET

D ZOOM

Mode

Meaning

z OFF

24×

To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 12× zoom

is performed.

CAMERA

To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× to

24× zoom is performed digitally (p. 31)

150×

To activate the digital zoom. More than 12× to

150× zoom is performed digitally

PHOTO REC z MEMORY

To record still images on a “Memory Stick”

when you press PHOTO in the tape recording or

recording standby (p. 46)

CAMERA

TAPE

To record still images on a tape when you press

PHOTO in the tape recording or recording

standby (p. 51)

16:9WIDE

z OFF

——

To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 53)

To compensate for camera-shake

STEADYSHOT z ON

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

OFF

To cancel the SteadyShot. Natural pictures are

produced when shooting a stationary object

with a tripod.

FRAME REC

INT. REC

z OFF

To deactivate Frame recording

To activate Frame recording (p. 83)

To activate interval recording (p. 81)

To deactivate interval recording

CAMERA

z OFF

SET

To set the INTERVAL and REC TIME for

interval recording

HOLOGRAM F z AUTO

The HOLOGRAM AF emits when focusing on

subjects is difficult in dark places (p. 141)

MEMORY/

NETWORK

OFF

The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit.

Notes on the SteadyShot

•The SteadyShot will not correct excessive camera-shake.

•Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot.

If you cancel the SteadyShot

The SteadyShot off indicator

appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive

compensation for camera-shake.

(continued on the following page)

209

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

VCR SET

Mode

Meaning

HiFi SOUND z STEREO

To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track

tape with main and sub sound (p. 229)

VCR

To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or

a dual sound tape with main sound

To play back a stereo tape with the right sound

or a dual sound track tape with sub sound

AUDIO MIX

——

To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and

stereo 2 (p. 118)

VCR

ST1

ST2

A/VtDV OUT z OFF

To output digital images and sound in analog

format using your camcorder

To output analog images and sound in digital

format using your camcorder (p. 204)

LCD/VF SET

LCD B. L.

z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to

VCR

normal

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

BRIGHT

——

To brighten the LCD screen

LCD COLOR

To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turn the

SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

VCR

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

To get low-

intensity

To get high-

intensity

VF B.L.

z BRT NORMAL

VCR

To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to

normal

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

BRIGHT

To brighten the viewfinder screen

GUIDEFRAME

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

z OFF

Does not display the guide frame.

Displays the guide frame (p. 64).

Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.

•When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during

recording.

•When you use power supplies other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically

selected.

Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR and/or VF B.L.

The recorded picture will not be affected.

210

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

MEMORY SET

Mode

Meaning

STILL SET

BURST

z OFF

To not record continuously

MEMORY/

NETWORK

NORMAL

To record from four to 13 images continuously

(p. 137)

EXP BRKTG

To record three images continuously with

different exposure

MULTI SCRN To record nine images continuously, display the

images on a single page divided into nine boxes

z SUPER FINE

To record still images in the finest image quality VCR

QUALITY

mode (p. 131)

MEMORY/

NETWORK

FINE

To record still images in the fine image quality

mode

STANDARD

To record still images in the standard image

quality mode

IMAGESIZE z 1152 × 864

To record still images at 1152 × 864 size

(p. 133)

MEMORY/

NETWORK

640 × 480

MOVIE SET

To record still images at 640 × 480 size

IMAGESIZE z 320 × 240

To record moving pictures at 320 × 240 size

(p. 133).

VCR

MEMORY/

NETWORK

160 × 112

To record moving pictures at 160 × 112 size.

REMAIN z AUTO

To display the remaining capacity of the

“Memory Stick” in the following cases:

• For five seconds after setting the POWER

switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only) or VCR

VCR

MEMORY/

NETWORK

• For five seconds after setting the POWER

switch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only) or VCR and inserting a

“Memory Stick”

• When the remaining capacity of the “Memory

Stick” is less than two minutes after setting the

POWER switch to MEMORY/NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only)

• For five seconds from the start of moving

picture recording

• For five seconds after completing a moving

picture recording

To always display the remaining capacity of the

“Memory Stick”

When you select QUALITY

The number of the recording pictures is displayed.

(continued on the following page)

211

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

MEMORY SET

Mode

Meaning

PHOTO SAVE

——

z SERIES

RESET

——

To copy still images on the tape onto the

“Memory Stick” (p. 163)

VCR

FILE NO.

To assign numbers to file in sequence even if the VCR

“Memory Stick” is changed

MEMORY/

NETWORK

To reset the file numbering each time the

“Memory Stick” is changed

DELETE ALL

FORMAT

To delete all unprotected images (p. 179)

MEMORY/

NETWORK

z RETURN

To cancel formatting

MEMORY/

NETWORK

To format an inserted “Memory Stick”

Formatting erases all information on the

“Memory Stick”

Check the contents of the “Memory Stick”

before formatting.

1. Select FORMAT.

2. Select OK with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial,

then press the dial.

3. After EXECUTE appears, press SEL/PUSH

EXEC dial. FORMATTING flashes during

formatting. COMPLETE appears when

formatting is finished.

Notes on formatting

•Do not do any of the following while FORMATTING is displayed:

– Switch the POWER switch.

– Operate buttons.

– Eject the “Memory Stick.”

•The supplied or optional “Memory Stick” has been formatted at factory. Formatting

the “Memory Stick” on your camcorder is not required.

•You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if the write-protect switch on the “Memory

Stick” is set to LOCK.

•Format the “Memory Stick” when “ FORMAT ERROR” is displayed.

•Formatting erases protected image data on the “Memory Stick.”

212

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

PRINT SET

DATE/TIME

Mode

Meaning

z OFF

To make prints without the recording date and

time

MEMORY/

NETWORK

DATE

To make prints with the recording date (p. 181)

To make prints with the recording date and time

DAY&TIME

CM SET

TITLE

——

To superimpose a title or make your own title

(p. 119, 122)

VCR

CAMERA

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

To erase the title you have superimposed

(p. 121)

VCR

CAMERA

z ON

OFF

To display the title you have superimposed

To not display the title

VCR

CM SEARCH z ON

To search using cassette memory (p. 89, 90, 92)

To search without using cassette memory

To label a cassette (p. 124)

VCR

OFF

TAPE TITLE

ERASE ALL

——

VCR

CAMERA

——

To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 125)

VCR

CAMERA

Note on PRINT SET

DATE/TIME is displayed only when an external printer (optional) is connected to the

intelligent accessory shoe.

(continued on the following page)

213

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

TAPE SET

REC MODE

Mode

Meaning

z SP

To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode

VCR

CAMERA

To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the

SP mode

AUDIO MODE z 12BIT

To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds)

VCR

CAMERA

16BIT

To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound

with high quality)

qREMAIN

z AUTO

To display the remaining tape bar:

•For about eight seconds after a cassette is

inserted and your camcorder calculates the

remaining amount of tape

VCR

CAMERA

•For about eight seconds after N or

DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL is pressed

To always display the remaining tape indicator

Adjusts audio recording level automatically

Adjusts audio recording level manually

MIC LEVEL

z AUTO

VCR

CAMERA

MANUAL

Notes on the LP mode

•When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing

the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or

VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.

•When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master

cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.

•You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the

tape to be audio dubbed.

•When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in

the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be

written properly between scenes.

Notes on AUDIO MODE

•You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.

•When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance

in AUDIO MIX.

214

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

SETUP MENU

CLOCK SET

Mode

Meaning

——

To set the date or time (p. 20).

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

USB STREAM z OFF

To deactivate the USB streaming

To activate the USB streaming

VCR

CAMERA

USBCONNECT z NORMAL

To connect and recognize the “Memory Stick”

drive.

MEMORY/

NETWORK

PTP

To connect and only copy a “Memory Stick”

image from your camcorder to a computer

(only with Windows XP or Mac OS X)

1. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select

“USB CONNECT” followed by “PTP”, then

press the dial to set.

2. Insert the “Memory Stick” into the

camcorder, and connect the camcorder to

the computer using a USB cable. Copy

Wizard will automatically start up.

LTR SIZE

z NORMAL

To display selected menu items in normal size

VCR

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

2×

To display selected menu items at twice the

normal size

LANGUAGE

z ENGLISH

To display the following information indicators

in English: min, REC, STBY and START

VCR

CAMERA

To display the information indicators in French

MEMORY/

NETWORK

FRANÇAIS

ESPAÑOL

To display the information indicators in

Spanish

PORTUGUÊS To display the information indicators in

Portuguese

To display the information indicators in

Chinese

To display the information indicators in Korean

DEMO MODE

To make the demonstration appear

To cancel the demonstration

z ON

CAMERA

OFF

Notes on DEMO MODE

•You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette or a “Memory Stick” is inserted in

your camcorder.

•You cannot select DEMO MODE when the color bar is displayed. When you press the

COLOR BAR button during demonstration, DEMO MODE is canceled.

•The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby) and the demonstration starts

about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a

cassette or a “Memory Stick” inserted.

To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette or a “Memory Stick,” set the POWER

switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY (Standby)

again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the POWER switch to

OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.

(continued on the following page)

215

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

OTHERS

Mode

Meaning

DATA CODE

z DATE/CAM

To display date, time and various settings

during playback when pressing the DATA

CODE button (p. 41)

VCR

MEMORY/

NETWORK

DATE

——

To display date and time during playback when

pressing the DATA CODE button

AREA SET

DST SET*

Temporarily change the area where you are

using your camcorder

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

z OFF

Not during daylight saving time

During daylight saving time

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

BEEP

z MELODY

To output the melody when you start/stop

recording or when an unusual condition occurs

on your camcorder

VCR

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

NORMAL

OFF

To output the beep instead of the melody

To cancel all sound including shutter sound

COMMANDER

z ON

To activate the Remote Commander supplied

with your camcorder

VCR

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

OFF

To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid

remote control operation caused by other VCR’s

remote control

* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.

216

Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u

POWER

sw itch

Icon/item

OTHERS

Mode

Meaning

DISPLAY

z LCD

To show the display on the LCD screen and in

the viewfinder

VCR

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

V-OUT/LCD

To show the display on the TV screen, LCD

screen and in the viewfinder

REC LAMP

VIDEO EDIT

z ON

To light up the camera recording lamp at the

front of your camcorder

CAMERA

MEMORY/

NETWORK

OFF

To turn the camera recording lamp off so that

the person is not aware of the recording

z RETURN

To cancel video editing.

VCR

TAPE

To make program and dub on the tape in the

other VCR (p. 98)

MEMORY

To make program and dub on a “Memory Stick”

(p. 160)

Note

If you press DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu

settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when

your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.

When recording a close subject

When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the

camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you

set REC LAMP to OFF.

In more than five minutes after removing the pow er supply

The FLASH LVL, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX, MIC LEVEL and COMMANDER settings

are returned to their default settings.

Other menu settings are held in memory even after removing the power supply.

217

— Tro u b le sh o o t in g —

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct

t ro u b le

If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to

troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, remove the power supply and contact

your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If “C:ss:ss” appears on

the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 225.

In t h e re co rd in g

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.

c Set it to CAMERA (p. 26).

• The tape has run out.

START/STOP does not operate.

c Rewind the cassette or insert a new one (p. 23, 43).

• The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.

c Use a new tape or slide the tab (p. 23).

• The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at

least one hour to acclimatize (p. 236).

The power goes off.

• While being operated when the POWER switch is set to

CAMERA, your camcorder has been in the standby for

more than five minutes.

c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to

CAMERA.

• The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.

c Install a charged battery pack.

You cannot record still images on a

“Memory Stick” in the recording or

recording standby.

• PHOTO REC is set to TAPE in menu settings.

c Set it to MEMORY (p. 209).

You cannot record still images on a

tape.

• PHOTO REC is set to MEMORY in menu settings.

c Set it to TAPE (p. 209).

The image on the viewfinder screen

is not clear.

• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.

c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 30).

• STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON (p. 209).

The SteadyShot does not work.

• The setting is the manual focus.

c Set FOCUS to AUTO (p. 76).

The autofocusing does not work.

• Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.

c Adjust for manual focusing (p. 76).

218

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The picture does not appear in the

viewfinder.

• The LCD panel is open.

c Close the LCD panel (p. 28).

A vertical band appears when you

shoot a subject such as lights or a

candle flame against a dark

background.

• The contrast between the subject and background is too

high. This is not a malfunction.

A vertical band appears when you

shoot a very bright subject.

• This is not a malfunction.

Some tiny white, red, blue or green

spots appear on the screen.

• The shutter speed is reduced. This is not a malfunction.

An unknown picture is displayed on

the screen.

• If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to

CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu

settings when neither a cassette nor a “Memory Stick” is

inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the

demonstration.

c Insert a cassette or a “Memory Stick” and the

demonstration stops.

You can also cancel DEMO MODE (p. 215).

The picture appears too bright, and

the subject does not appear on the

screen.

• The backlight is active.

c Set it off (p. 34).

• BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 216).

The click of the shutter does not

sound.

• Set the STEADYSHOT in the menu settings to OFF

(p. 209).

Black bands appear when you

record TV or computer screen.

• The power of the external flash is off or the power supply

is not installed.

An external flash (optional) does not

work.

c Turn on the external flash or install the power supply.

• Two or more external flashes (optional) are attached.

c Only one external flash (optional) can be attached.

• The manual adjustment is not suitable for the situations

(The indicator flashes).

The image is not bright with video

flash light (optional).

c Set the AUTO LOCK selector to AUTO LOCK, or cancel

the manual adjustment (p. 67).

(continued on the following page)

219

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le

In t h e p la yb a ck

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

• The POWER switch is not set to VCR.

c Set it to VCR (p. 39).

The tape does not move when a

video control button is pressed.

• The cassette has run out of the tape.

The playback button does not work.

c Rewind the tape (p. 39).

• The video heads may be dirty.

c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)

(p. 237).

There are horizontal lines on the

picture, or the playback picture is not

clear or does not appear.

• The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2

in the menu settings.

No sound or only a low sound is

heard when playing back a tape.

c Set it to STEREO (p. 210).

• The volume is turned to minimum.

c Turn up the volume (p. 39).

• AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the menu settings.

c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 210).

• The cassette has no cassette memory.

c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 90).

• CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON (p. 213).

Displaying the recorded date, DATE

SEARCH does not work.

• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

(p. 91).

• The cassette has no cassette memory.

c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 89).

• CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON (p. 213).

TITLE SEARCH does not work.

• There is no title in the tape.

c Superimpose the titles (p. 119).

• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

(p. 89).

• AUDIO MIX is set to the ST1 side in the menu settings.

c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 118).

The new sound added to the

recorded tape is not heard.

• TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.

The title is not displayed.

c Set it to ON (p. 213).

220

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le

In t h e re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.

c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).

The power does not turn on.

• The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.

c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 19).

• The tape was ejected after recording when using a cassette

without cassette memory (p. 37).

The end search does not work.

• You have not recorded on the new cassette yet (p. 37).

• The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway

(p. 37).

The end search does not work

correctly.

• The operating temperature is too low.

• The battery pack is not fully charged.

c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).

• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be

recharged.

The battery pack is quickly

discharged.

c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).

• You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or

cold environment for a long time.

The battery remaining time indicator

does not indicate the correct time.

• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be

recharged.

c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).

• The battery is not fully charged.

c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).

• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.

c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the

indication on the battery remaining indicator is correct

(p. 16).

• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.

c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the

indication on the battery remaining battery time

indicator is correct (p. 16).

The power goes off although the

battery remaining time indicator

indicates that the battery pack has

enough power to operate.

• The power supply is disconnected.

c Connect it firmly (p. 15, 19).

• The battery is dead.

The cassette cannot be removed from

the holder.

c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).

• Moisture condensation has occurred.

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at

least one hour to acclimatize (p. 236).

The % and Z indicators flash and no

functions except for cassette ejection

work.

• The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.

c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 230).

indicator does not appear when

using a cassette with cassette

memory.

• The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape

indicator (p. 214).

Remaining tape indicator is not

displayed.

(continued on the following page)

221

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le

Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

• The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY/NETWORK

(DCR-TRV950 only).

The “Memory Stick” does not

function.

c Set it to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV950 only)

(p. 129).

• The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.

c Insert a “Memory Stick” (p. 128).

• The “Memory Stick” has already been full.

c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 177).

• The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted.

c Format the “Memory Stick” or use another “Memory

Stick” (p. 128, 212).

Recording does not function.

The image cannot be deleted.

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• The image is protected.

c Cancel image protection (p. 176).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

You cannot format the “Memory

Stick.”

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

Deleting all the images cannot be

carried out.

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

You cannot protect the image.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• INDEX screen is not displayed.

c Press INDEX to display the INDEX screen and protect

the image (p. 176).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

LOCK.

You cannot write a print mark on

the still image.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• INDEX screen is not displayed.

c Press INDEX to display the INDEX screen and write the

print marks on the screen (p. 180).

• You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.

c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture (p.

180).

• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to

PHOTO SAVE does not work.

LOCK.

c Release the lock (p. 126).

• You may not be able to play back images in actual size

when you try to play back images recorded by other

equipment. This is not a malfunction.

You cannot play back images in

actual size.

• Your camcorder cannot play back some images processed

with a computer (The file name will blink).

• If you record images with any other equipment, the

images may not play back normally on your camcorder.

You cannot play back image data.

222

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le

Ot h e rs

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The title is not recorded.

• The cassette has no cassette memory.

c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 119).

• The cassette memory is full.

c Erase unwanted titles (p. 121).

• The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.

c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not

visible (p. 23).

• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions.

c Superimpose the title to recorded positions (p. 120).

The cassette label is not recorded.

• The cassette has no cassette memory.

c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 124).

• The cassette memory is full.

c Erase unwanted data (p. 121,125).

• The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.

c Slide the write-protect tab so that red mark is not visible

(p. 23).

Digital program editing to a tape

does not function.

• The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.

c Check the connection and set the input selector on the

VCR again (p. 98)

• The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other

than Sony using the i.LINK cable.

c Set it to IR (p. 99).

• You have attempted to set a program on a blank portion of

the tape.

c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 106).

• The camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.

c Adjust the synchronization (p. 104).

• The IR SETUP code is incorrect.

c Set the correct code (p. 100).

Digital program editing to a

“Memory Stick” does not function.

• Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is

attempted.

c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 160).

The Remote Commander supplied

with your camcorder does not work.

• COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.

c Set it to ON (p. 216).

• Something is blocking the infrared rays.

c Remove the obstacle.

• The batteries are inserted with + and – incorrectly

matching + and – inside the battery compartment.

c Insert the batteries correctly (p. 251).

• The batteries are dead.

c Insert new ones (p. 251).

The picture from a TV or VCR does

not appear even when your

camcorder is connected to output on

the TV or VCR.

• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings.

c Set it to LCD (p. 217).

(continued on the following page)

223

Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le

Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

The cassette cannot be removed

even if the cassette lid is open.

• Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder

(p. 236).

The melody or beep sounds for

five seconds.

• Moisture condensation has occurred.

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at

least one hour to acclimatize (p. 236).

• Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.

c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate

your camcorder.

When you set the POWER switch to

VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move

your camcorder, you may hear a

clattering sound from inside your

camcorder.

• This is because some functions use a linear mechanism.

Your camcorder is not malfunctioning.

You cannot charge the battery pack.

• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).

c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16).

While charging the battery pack, no

indicator appears, the indicator

flashes in the display window.

• The battery pack is not properly installed.

c Install it properly (p. 15).

• Something is wrong with the battery pack.

c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony

service facility.

• Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or

remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one minute.

Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press

the RESET button using a sharp-pointed object (If you

press the RESET button, all the settings including the date

and time return to their defaults.) (p. 15, 19, 245).

No function works though the

power is on.

• The DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button is pressed.

c Press the LCD screen lightly.

The buttons do not appear on the

touch panel.

c Press the DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button on your

camcorder or the DISPLAY button on the Remote

Commander (p. 41).

• Adjust the screen (CALIBRATION) (p. 238).

The buttons on the LCD screen do

not work.

• The mirror mode is activated.

This is not a malfunction (p. 32).

The indicators appear mirror-

reversed in the viewfinder or on the

TV screen.

• The USB cable was connected before installation of the

USB driver was completed.

c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB

driver (p. 188, 191, 202).

Image data cannot be transferred by

the USB connection.

• USBCONNECT is set to PTP in the menu settings when

the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-

TRV950 only).

c Set it to NORMAL (p. 215).

224

Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y

Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display

function.

LCD scre e n , Vie w fin d e r o r

Disp la y w in d o w

This function displays the current state of your

camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a

letter and figures) on the screen. If a 5-digit code is

displayed, check the following list of codes. The

last two digits (indicated by ss) differ depending

on the state of your camcorder.

C:21:00

Self-diagnosis display

•C:ss:ss

You can service your camcorder

yourself.

•E:ss:ss

Contact your Sony dealer or local

authorized Sony service facility.

Five-digit display

Cause and/or Corrective Actions

• You are using a battery pack that is not an

C:04:ss

“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.

c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 18, 231).

C:21:ss

• Moisture condensation has occurred.

c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at

least one hour to acclimatize (p. 236).

C:22:ss

• The video heads are dirty.

c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)

(p. 237).

C:31:ss

C:32:ss

• A malfunction other than the above that you can service

has occurred.

c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate

your camcorder.

c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or

remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power

supply, operate your camcorder.

E:20:ss

E:61:ss

E:62:ss

E:91:ss

• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.

c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony

service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code

(example: E:61:10).

If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times,

contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

225

Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s

If indicators and messages appear on the screen or in the display window, check the

following:

See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.

Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs

Warning indicator pertaining to

“Memory Stick” formatting*

Fast flashing:

100–0001

C:21:00

•The “Memory Stick” is not formatted

correctly (p. 212).

•The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted

(p. 126).

100-0001 Warning indicator pertaining to

files

Slow flashing:

Q Warning indicator pertaining to the

tape

Slow flashing:

•The tape is near the end.

•No cassette is inserted.*

•The write-protect tab on the cassette is

exposed (red) (p. 23).*

•The file is corrupted.

•The file is unreadable.

•You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX on a

moving picture (p. 148).

C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 225).

Fast flashing:

•The cassette has run out of the tape.*

E The battery is dead or nearly dead

Slow flashing:

•The battery is nearly dead.

Depending on the operating conditions,

environment and battery condition, the E

indicator may flash even if there are

approximately five to 10 minutes remaining.

Z You need to eject the cassette*

Slow flashing:

•The write-protect tab on the cassette is

exposed (red) (p. 23).

Fast flashing:

•Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 236).

•The cassette has run out of the tape.

•The self-diagnosis display function is

activated (p. 225).

Fast flashing:

•The battery is dead (p. 16).

% Moisture condensation has occurred*

Fast flashing:

•Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,

and leave it for about one hour with the

cassette compartment open (p. 236).

- The image is protected*

Slow flashing:

•The image is protected (p. 176).

Warning indicator pertaining to the flash

Slow flashing:

•During charging

Warning indicator pertaining to

cassette memory*

Slow flashing:

•No cassette with cassette memory is inserted

(p. 228).

Fast flashing:

•The self-diagnosis display function is

activated (p. 225).*

•There is something wrong with the built-in

flash or the external flash (optional).

Warning indicator pertaining to the

“Memory Stick”

Slow flashing:

•No “Memory Stick” is inserted.

Warning indicator pertaining to

recording

Slow flashing:

• The still image cannot be recorded on a tape

or the “Memory Stick” (p. 46, 52)

Fast flashing*:

•The “Memory Stick” is not readable on your

camcorder (p. 126).

•The image cannot be recorded on the

“Memory Stick.”

* You hear the melody or beep.

226

Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s

Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s

•CLOCK SET

•FOR “InfoLITHIUM”

BATTERY ONLY

Set the date and time (p. 20).

Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 18).

•

CLEANING CASSETTE** The video heads are dirty (p. 237).

FULL

16BIT

The cassette memory is full.*

AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 214).* You cannot

dub new audio.

•

REC MODE

TAPE

REC MODE is set to LP (p. 214).* You cannot dub

new audio.

There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot

dub new audio.

The i.LINK cable is connected (p. 118).* You cannot

dub new audio.

“i.LINK” CABLE

•

FULL

The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 139).*

The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is

set to LOCK (p. 126).*

•

NO FILE

No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick”

(p. 166, 182).*

•

NO MEMORY STICK

AUDIO ERROR

No “Memory Stick” is inserted.*

You are trying to record an image with sound that

cannot be recorded by your camcorder on the

“Memory Stick” (p. 157).*

•

MEMORY STICK ERROR

FORMAT ERROR

The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 128).*

The “Memory Stick” is not recognized. Check the

format (p. 145, 212).*

•

- DIRECTORY ERROR

PLAY ERROR

There are more than two of the same directories

(p. 166).*

The image cannot be played back. Reinsert the

“Memory Stick,” then play back the image again.

REC ERROR

Check the input signals before retrying recording.

•COPY INHIBIT

The tape contains copyright control signals for

•Q Z TAPE END

•Q NO TAPE

The tape has reached its end.*

Insert a cassette.*

•

NO PRINT MARK

You selected MARKED in 9PIC PRINT on the touch

panel using a “Memory Stick” containing no image

with a print mark. (p. 182)*

•

NO STILL IMAGE FILE

You selected MULTI in 9PIC PRINT on the touch

panel using a “Memory Stick” containing no still

image. (p. 182)*

•DELETING

You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images

on the “Memory Stick.”*

•FORMATTING

You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a

“Memory Stick.”*

•

NOW CHARGING

Charging an external flash (optional) does not work

correctly.*

* You hear the melody or beep.

**The x indicator and “

another on the screen.

CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after

227

— Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —

Usa b le ca sse t t e s

Se le ct in g ca sse t t e t yp e s

You can use

Digital8,

ED Betamax,

mini DV cassettes only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm,

Hi8,

VHS,

VHSC,

MICRO MV cassette.

S-VHS,

S-VHSC, Betamax,

DV or

* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette

memory. Cassettes with cassette memory have the (Cassette Memory) mark.

We recommend that you use cassette with cassette memory.

IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write

data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.

The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the

tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions,

titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly.

Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape.

Press END SCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next

recording if you operate the following:

– You have ejected the cassette while recording.

– You have played back the tape.

– You have used the edit search.

If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the

beginning to the end of the tape as described above.

The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder

without a cassette memory on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory.

mark on the cassette

The memory capacity of cassettes marked with

is 4Kbit. Your camcorder can

accommodate tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16Kbit. 16Kbit cassettes are

marked with

This is the mini DV mark.

This is the Cassette Memory mark.

These are trademarks.

228

Usa b le ca sse t t e s

Co p yrig h t sig n a l

Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck

Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on tape that has recorded

your camcorder.

Wh e n yo u re co rd

You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals

for copyright protection of software.

“COPY INHIBIT” appears on the screen or on the TV screen if you try to record such

software.

Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.

Au d io m o d e

12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in

stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be

adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback.

Both sounds can be played back.

16-bit mode: New audio cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in

high quality. Moreover, your camcorder can also play back sound

recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape

recorded in the 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on screen.

Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e

When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi

SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 210).

Sound from speaker

HiFi Sound

mode

Playing back

a stereo tape

Playing back a dual

sound track tape

Main sound and

sub sound

STEREO

Stereo

Left sound

Main sound

Sub sound

Right sound

You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.

229

Usa b le ca sse t t e s

No t e s o n t h e ca sse t t e

Wh e n a ffixin g a la b e l o n t h e ca sse t t e

Be sure to affix a label only at the locations illustrated below [a ] to prevent malfunction

of your camcorder.

Aft e r u sin g t h e ca sse t t e

Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it upright.

Wh e n t h e ca sse t t e m e m o ry d o e s n o t w o rk

Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of the cassette may be dirty or dusty.

Cle a n in g t h e g o ld -p la t e d co n n e ct o r

If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape

indicator is sometimes not displayed correctly, and you may not be able to operate

functions using cassette memory. Clean the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool

swab, about every 10 times that the cassette is ejected. [b ]

Do not affix a label

along this border.

[b ]

[a ]

230

Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck

Wh a t is t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck?

The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for

communicating information related to operating conditions between the battery pack

and an optional AC adaptor/charger.

The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the

operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in

minutes.

With an AC adaptor/charger (optional), the remaining battery time and charging time

are displayed.

Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

•Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.

•We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between

10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until FULL appears in the display window, indicating that

the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery outside of this temperature

range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack.

•After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your

camcorder or remove the battery pack.

Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

•Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time

that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following to

ensure longer battery pack use:

– Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder

immediately before you start taking shots.

– Use the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/QM71/FM90/FM91/QM91,

optional).

•Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast forward or

rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large-capacity

battery pack (NP-FM70/QM71/FM90/FM91/QM91, optional).

•Be sure to turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing

back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is

in the standby or playback pause.

•Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,

and make trial recordings before taking the actual recording.

•Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.

Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r

•If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the

battery pack has enough power to operate, fully charge the battery pack again so that

the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that

the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high

temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is

frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate

recording time.

•The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes

depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even

if the remaining battery time is about five to ten minutes.

231

Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck

Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck

•If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per

year to maintain proper function.

1. Fully charge the battery.

2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.

3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.

•To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the recording

standby until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.

Ba t t e ry life

•The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and

more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a

probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new

battery pack.

•The battery life varies according to how it is stored and operating conditions and

environment for each battery pack.

232

Ab o u t i.LINK

The DV Interface on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV Interface. This section

describes the i.LINK standard and its features.

Wh a t is i.LINK?

i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other

data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling

other equipment.

i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible

applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.

When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy

chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that

this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected

equipment.

Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the

characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that

operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected

equipment.

Note

Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK

cable. When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more

i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be

connected.

Ab o u t t h e n a m e “ i.LINK”

i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY,

and is a trademark approved by many corporations.

IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and

Electronic Engineers.

i.LINK b a u d ra t e

i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum

baud rates are defined:

S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)

S200 (approx. 200Mbps)

S400 (approx. 400Mbps)

The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the operating instructions of each

equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.

The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is

“S100”.

When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the

baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.

*What is Mbps?

Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or

received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps means that 100 megabits

of data can be sent in one second.

233

Ab o u t i.LINK

i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it

For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having

DV Interface, see page 97 and 111.

This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV Interface) compatible equipment

made by SONY (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment.

Before connecting this unit to a personal computer, make sure that application software

supported by this unit is already installed on the personal computer.

For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating

instructions of the equipment to be connected.

Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le

Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).

i.LINK and are trademarks.

234

Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d

Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details,

refer to the separate Network Operating Instructions. (DCR-TRV950 only)

You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor

supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

When charging the battery pack, use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if

necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet [b ].

AC-L10A/L10B/L10C

[a ]

[b ]

Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback

picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/VIDEO input

jack.

The following shows TV color systems used overseas.

NTSC system

Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,

Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,

Venezuela, etc.

PAL system

Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,

Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,

Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,

United Kingdom etc.

PAL-M system

Brazil

PAL-N system

Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

SECAM system

Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

235

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d

p re ca u t io n s

Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n

If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may

condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,

the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not

operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep and the %

indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted

in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.

If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d

None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your

camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid open. Your camcorder

can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on

again.

If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation.

If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid

is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is

ejected.

Note on moisture condensation

Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm

place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:

•You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by heating device.

•You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place

outside.

•You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.

•You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place.

How to prevent moisture condensation

When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your

camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature

inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).

236

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n

Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d s

To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video heads

may be dirty when:

•Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.

•Playback pictures do not move.

•Playback pictures do not appear.

•The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another,

or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording.

If the above problem [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the

Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above

problem persists, repeat cleaning.

[a ]

[b ]

[c]

If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].

Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the Cleaning

cloth (supplied) to clean the LCD screen. When you use the LCD Cleaning Kit

(optional), do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the LCD screen. Clean the LCD

screen with cleaning paper moistened with the liquid.

237

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s

Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n (CALIBRATION)

The buttons on the touch panel may not work correctly. If this happens, follow the

procedure below.

(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).

(2) Eject the cassette from your camcorder, then disconnect any connecting cable

from your camcorder.

(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL on

your camcorder, then keep pressing DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL for about five

seconds.

(4) Follow the procedure below using an object such as the corner of a “Memory

Stick” supplied with your camcorder.

You can use the supplied stylus for this operation (DCR-TRV950 only).

1 Touch at the upper left corner.

2 Touch at the lower right corner.

3 Touch in the middle of the screen.

CALIBRATE

INDEX

Note

If you do not press the right spot, always returns to the position at the upper left

corner. In this case, start from step 4 again.

238

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s

Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry

Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery so that the date, time and other

settings are retained even when the POWER switch is turned off. The built-in

rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The

battery, however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder.

It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your

camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not

affect camcorder operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the

battery if the battery is discharged.

Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:

•Connect your camcorder to house current using the AC power adaptor supplied with

your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for

more than 24 hours.

•Or, install a charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with

the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.

Pre ca u t io n s

Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n

•Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).

•For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating

instructions.

•If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it

checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.

•Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.

•Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.

•Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so

might cause heat to build up inside.

•Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.

•Do not press the LCD screen with a sharp-pointed object other than the supplied

stylus (DCR-TRV950 only).

•If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD

screen. This is not a malfunction.

•While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a

malfunction.

On h a n d lin g t a p e s

•Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are

used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.

•Do not open the cassette protect cover or touch the tape.

•Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with

a soft cloth.

239

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s

Ca m co rd e r ca re

•Remove the cassette, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and

VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is

not to be used for a long time.

•Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,

remove them with a soft cloth.

•Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with

a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the

finish.

•Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy

beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause

your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

AC p o w e r a d a p t o r

•Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To

disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.

•Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or

damaged.

•Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage

the cord and may cause fire or electric shock.

•Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the

connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.

•Always keep metal contacts clean.

•Do not disassemble the unit.

•Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.

•While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers

and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and

video operation.

•The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

•Do not place the unit in locations that are:

– Extremely hot or cold

– Dusty or dirty

– Very humid

– Vibrating

Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s

•Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:

– When there are fingerprints on the lens surface.

– In hot or humid locations.

– When the lens is used in environments such as the seaside.

•Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.

To prevent mold from growing, periodically perform the above.

We recommend turning on and operating the video camera recorder about once per

month to keep the video camera recorder in an optimum state for a long time.

240

Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s

Ba t t e ry p a ck

•Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.

•To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into

contact with the battery terminals.

•Keep the battery pack away from fire.

•Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car

parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.

•Keep the battery pack dry.

•Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.

•Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.

•Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely.

•Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.

No t e s o n d ry b a t t e rie s

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:

– Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and – correctly matching the + and – inside

the battery compartment.

– Dry batteries are not rechargeable.

– Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.

– Do not use different types of batteries.

– Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.

– Do not use leaking batteries.

If batteries are leaking

•Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.

•If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.

•If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a

doctor.

If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

241

Sp e cifica t io n s

Color temperature

Auto, nIndoor (3 200 K),

Outdoor (5 800 K),

Minimum illumination

7 lx (lux) (F 1.6)

Wire le ss co m m u n ica t io n s

Vid e o ca m e ra

re co rd e r

(DCR-TRV950 only)

Communications system

Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1

Max. baud rate^{1) 2)}

Syst e m

Video recording system

2 rotary heads

Approx. 723 kbps

Output

In p u t /Ou t p u t co n n e ct o rs

Helical scanning system

Audio recording system

Rotary heads, PCM system

Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,

stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits

(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)

Video signal

NTSC color, EIA standards

Usable cassette

Mini DV cassette with the

mark printed

Tape speed

SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s

LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s

Recording/playback time (using

cassette DVM60)

Bluetooth standard Power Class 2

Communications distance²⁾

Max. wireless distance

Approx. 10 m (393 3/4 in.) (When

connecting to BTA-NW1/NW1A)

Compatible Bluetooth profile³⁾

Generic Access Profile

Dial-up Networking Profile

Operating frequency band

2.4 GHz band (2.400 GHz –

2.483 5 GHz)

S video input/output

4-pin mini DIN

Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,

75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced

Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,

75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced

Audio/Video input/output

AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p,

75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced, sync

negative

327 mV, (at output impedance

more than 47 kΩ (kilohms))

Output impedance with less than

2.2 kΩ (kilohms)/Stereo minijack

(ø 3.5 mm)

Input impedance more than

47 kΩ (kilohms)

DV input/output

4-pin connector

Headphone jack

Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)

LANC jack

Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)

USB jack

mini-B

MIC jack

Max. baud rate of Bluetooth

standard Ver.1.1

Varies according to the distance

between communicating

devices, presence of obstacles,

radiowave conditions, and other

factors.

SP: 1 hour

LP: 1.5 hours

Fastforw ard/rew ind time (using

cassette DVM60)

This is a specification matched

When using the battery pack:

Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds

When using the AC power

adaptor:

Approx. 1 min. and 45 seconds

View finder

Electric viewfinder (color)

Image device

3.8 mm (1/4.7 type) 3 CCD

(Charge Coupled Device)

Gross: Approx. 1 070 000 pixels

Effective (still):

to specific usage requirements

between Bluetooth compatible

devices. It is laid down in the

Bluetooth standards.

Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance

with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output

impedance 6.8 kΩ (kilohms) (ø 3.5

mm)

Stereo type

Approx. 1 000 000 pixels

Effective (moving):

Approx. 690 000 pixels

Lens

LCD scre e n

Picture

8.8 cm (3.5 type)

72.2 × 50.4 mm (2 7/8 × 2 in.)

Total dot number

246 400 (1 120 × 220)

Combined power zoom lens

Filter diameter: 37 mm

(1 1/2 in)

12× (Optical), 150× (Digital)

F 1.6 – 2.8

Focal length

3.6 – 43.2 mm (5/32 – 1 3/4 in.)

When converted to a 35 mm still

camera

In CAMERA

49 – 588 mm (1 15/16 – 23 1/4 in.)

In MEMORY

41 – 492 mm (1 5/8 – 19 3/8 in.)

242

Sp e cifica t io n s

Ge n e ra l

Ba t t e ry p a ck

Pow er requirements

7.2 V (battery pack)

8.4 V (AC power adaptor)

Average pow er consumption

(w hen using the battery pack)

During camera recording using

LCD

6.3 W

Viewfinder

4.9 W

Maximum output voltage

DC 8.4 V

Output voltage

DC 7.2 V

Capacity

8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)

Dimensions (approx.)

38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm

(1 9/16 × 13/16 × 2 1/4 in.)

(w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

76 g (2.7 oz)

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

–20°C to + 60°C

Type

Lithium ion

(–4°F to + 140°F)

Dimensions (Approx.)

93 × 99 × 202 mm

(3 3/4 × 4 × 8 in.) (w/h/d)

Mass (Approx.)

DCR-TRV950: 970 g (2 lb 2 oz)

DCR-TRV940: 960 g (2 lb 1 oz)

main unit only

“ Me m o ry St ick”

Memory

Flash memory

8MB: MSA-8A

Operating voltage

DCR-TRV950: 1.1kg (2 lb 6 oz)

DCR-TRV940: 1.1kg (2 lb 6 oz)

including the battery pack

NP-FM50, cassette DVM60 and

lens cap, Shoulder strap

Supplied accessories

See page 14.

2.7 – 3.6 V

Pow er consumption

Approx. 45 mA in the operating

mode

Approx. 130 µA in the standby

mode

Dimensions (approx.)

50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm

(2 × 1/8 × 7/8 in.) (w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

4 g (0.14 oz)

AC p o w e r a d a p t o r

Pow er requirements

100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Pow er consumption

23 W

Design and specifications are

subject to change without notice.

Output voltage

DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the

operating mode

Operating temperature

0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

–20°C to + 60°C

(–4°F to + 140°F)

Dimensions (approx.)

125 × 39 × 62 mm

(5 × 1 9/16 × 2 1/2 in.) (w/h/d)

excluding projecting parts

Mass (approx.)

280 g (9.8 oz)

excluding power cord

243

— Qu ick Re fe re n ce —

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

Ca m co rd e r

1 Flash (p. 48, 139)

8 Camera recording lamp (p. 26)

9 Display w indow (p. 16)

(flash) button (p. 48, 139)

2 Focus ring (p. 76)

3 Lens

4 Lens hood

qa FOCUS sw itch (p. 76)

qs PUSH AUTO button (p. 76)

qd FADER button * (p. 56)

qf Microphone

5 HOLOGRAM AF emitter (p. 141)

6 MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (red)

Connect an external microphone

(optional). This jack also accepts a

“plug-in-power” microphone.

qg Infrared rays emitter (p. 101)

qh Remote sensor

7 MIC jack cover

* The FADER button has a tactile dot for easy operation.

Removing the lens hood

To remove the lens hood to attach the optional wide teleconversion lens filter, etc.,

unscrew the lens hood counterclockwise. To attach the lens hood again, fit the

protrusions on the lens hood into the holes of the lens and screw the lens hood

clockwise.

When using additional filters

Shading may occur on the recorded image due to the lens hood.

244

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

REW

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE

REC

qj Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 115, 181)

qk LCD/Touch panel screen (p. 24, 129)

ql OPEN button

wf Viewfinder lens adjustment lever (p. 30)

wg VOLUME buttons ** (p. 39)

wh Hooks for shoulder strap

wj SEL/PUSH EXEC dial

w; Speaker

wa Video control buttons *

ws DISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button (p. 41)

wd View finder (p. 30)

wk MENU button (p. 207)

wl AUTO LOCK selector (p. 67)

e; RESET button (p. 224)

* The PLAY button of the Video control buttons has a raised tactile dot for easy

operation.

** The + side of VOLUME buttons has a raised tactile dot for easy operation.

Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe

•The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video

light or microphone.

•The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the

power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the

accessory for further information.

•The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory

securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten

the screw.

•To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the

accessory.

245

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

ea Access lamp

r; AUDIO/VIDEO ID-2 jack (yellow ) (p. 45,

95, 146, 158, 204)

es MEMORY OPEN button (p. 128)

ed LOCK sw itch (p. 26)

ra i (headphones) jack (green)

When you use headphones, the speaker

on your camcorder is silent.

ef POWER sw itch

eg START/STOP button (p. 26)

eh DC IN jack (p. 19)

(LANC) jack (blue)

rd Jack cover (p. 45)

ej DC IN jack cover

rf (USB) jack (p. 183)

ek MEMORY EJECT button (p. 128)

el “Memory Stick” slot (p. 128)

rg S VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 45, 95, 146, 158)

rh DV Interface (p. 97, 111, 147, 159, 204)

LANC

The LANC stands for Local Application Control Bus System. The LANC control

jack is used for controlling the tape transport of video equipment and peripherals

connected to it. This jack has the same function as the jack indicated as CONTROL L or

REMOTE.

246

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

rj Pow er zoom lever (p. 31, 86, 173)

td NETWORK button (p. 205)

(DCR-TRV950 only)

rk PHOTO button (p. 46, 51, 135)

tf (Bluetooth) lamp (p. 205)

OPEN/ Z EJECT lever (p. 23)

(DCR-TRV950 only)

t; Grip strap

tg Cassette lid

ta Holder (DCR-TRV950 only)

ts Stylus (p. 206) (DCR-TRV950 only)

Fastening the grip strap

Fasten the grip strap firmly.

247

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

th AUDIO DUB button (p. 117)

tj BACK LIGHT button (p. 34)

tk SPOT LIGHT button * (p. 35)

tl EDITSEARCH button * (p. 37)

y; DATA CODE button (p. 41)

ya COLOR BAR button (p. 66)

ys CUSTOM PRESET button (p. 62)

yd PROGRAM AE button (p. 68)

yf SHUTTER SPEED button * (p. 70)

yg WHT BAL button (p. 72)

yh EXPOSURE button (p. 74)

yj AUDIO LEVEL button (p. 79)

yk ZEBRA selector (p. 65)

*Each of the buttons has a raised tactile dot. (The EDIT SEARCH button has it on the – 7 side.)

Use it for easy operation.

248

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

yl Battery Pack (p. 15)

u; Tripod receptacle

Make sure that the length of the tripod

screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inch).

Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod

securely, and the screw may damage

your camcorder.

ua Lens cap (p. 26)

249

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r

The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder

function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.

1 PHOTO button (p. 46, 51, 135)

2 DISPLAY button (p. 41)

8 Transmitter

Point toward the remote sensor to

control your camcorder after turning on

your camcorder.

3 Memory control buttons

4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 89, 90, 92)

5 Video control buttons (p. 43)

6 REC button

9 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 88)

q; START/STOP button (p. 26)

qa DATA CODE button (p. 41)

qs Pow er zoom button (p. 31)

qd ./> buttons (p. 89, 90, 92)

qf AUDIO DUB button (p. 117)

7 MARK button (p. 106, 160)

250

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r

Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – on the batteries to

the + and – in the battery compartment.

Notes on the Remote Commander

•Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or

overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.

•Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3

are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous

remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR

2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR

with black paper.

251

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs

LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r

120min

STILL

STBY

0 12 34

12min

–

ZERO SET

MEMORY

END

16 9WIDE

NEG. ART

AUTO

60 AWB

F1.8 9db

DV IN

16BIT

100–0001

1 Cassette memory (p. 12, 228)

2 Remaining battery time (p. 33)

3 Zoom (p. 31)/

qj STBY/REC (p. 26)/

Video control mode (p. 43)/

Image size (p. 133)/

Image quality (p. 131)

Exposure (p. 74)/

Data file name (p. 126)

qk Warning (p. 226)

ql Tape counter (p. 33)/

Time code (p. 33)/

4 Digital effect (p. 59, 85)/

MEMORY MIX (p. 148)/

FADER (p. 55)

Self-diagnosis (p. 225)/

Tape photo (p. 51)/

Memory photo (p. 46, 135)/

Image number (p. 166)

5 16:9WIDE (p. 53)

6 Picture effect (p. 58, 84)

7 Custom preset (p. 62)

8 Data code (p. 41)

w; Remaining tape (p. 33)/

Memory playback (p. 166)

9 Volume (p. 39)/

Date (p. 33)

0 PROGRAM AE (p. 67)

wa ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 88)

ws END SEARCH (p. 37)

wd A/V t DV (p. 204)/

qa Backlight (p. 34)/

DV IN (p. 112)

Spot light (p. 35)

wf Audio mode (p. 214)

qs SteadyShot off (p. 209)

qd Manual focus/Infinity (p. 76)

qf Self-timer (p. 36, 50, 143, 155)

qg Recording mode (p. 27)

qh HOLOGRAM AF (p. 141)

wg Data file name (p. 126)/

Time (p. 33)/

Audio input level (p. 79)

wh Flash (p. 48, 139)

wj Continuous photo recording (p. 137)

252

Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls

Disp la y w in d o w

wk Remaining battery time indicator

(p. 16)/

Tape counter (p. 33)/

Time code indicator (p. 33)/

Image number (p. 166)/

Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 225)

wl Remaining battery time (p. 16)

e; FULL charge indicator (p. 16)

253

In d e x

Grip strap ............................... 247

Guide frame ............................. 64

i (Headphone) jack ............. 246

Heads...................................... 237

HiFi SOUND ......................... 210

HOLOGRAM AF .................. 141

A, B

AC power adaptor .................. 16

Adjusting viewfinder ............. 30

Audio dubbing ...................... 115

AUDIO LEVEL ....................... 79

AUDIO MIX .......................... 210

Audio mode........................... 214

AUTO LOCK selector ............ 67

Auto red-eye reduction

........................................ 48, 139

AUTO SHTR .......................... 208

A/V connecting cable

.......... 45, 95, 109, 146, 158, 204

BACK LIGHT .......................... 34

Battery pack ............................. 15

BEEP ....................................... 216

BOUNCE .................................. 55

Recording level ....................... 79

Recording time ........................ 17

Rec Review .............................. 38

Remaining battery time

indicator ................................ 33

Remaining tape indicator ...... 33

Remote Commander ............ 250

Remote sensor ....................... 244

RESET ..................................... 224

I, J, K, L

i.LINK ..................................... 233

i.LINK cable

................ 97, 111, 147, 159, 204

Image protection ................... 176

Image quality ........................ 131

Image size .............................. 133

Index screen ........................... 167

“InfoLITHIUM” battery ...... 231

Infrared rays emitter ............. 101

Insert editing ......................... 113

Intelligent accessory shoe .... 245

Interval recording ................... 81

JPEG ........................................ 126

Labeling a cassette ................ 124

LANC jack ............................. 246

LUMINANCEKEY ................. 59

Self-diagnosis display .......... 225

Self-timer recording

.......................... 36, 50, 143, 155

Shutter speed ........................... 70

Signal convert function ........ 204

Skip scan .................................. 43

Slide show .............................. 175

Slow playback ......................... 43

SPOT FOCUS .......................... 78

Spot light .................................. 35

STEADYSHOT ...................... 209

Stereo tape ............................. 229

STILL ........................................ 59

Stylus ...................................... 206

Sub sound .............................. 229

S VIDEO jack

C, D

CALIBRATION ..................... 238

Camera chromakey .............. 148

Cassette memory ............ 12, 228

Charging battery ..................... 16

Charging built-in rechargeable

battery ................................. 239

Clock set ................................... 20

Color bar .................................. 66

Continuous photo recording

.............................................. 137

Custom preset ......................... 62

Data code ................................. 41

Date search .............................. 90

DEMO MODE ....................... 215

DIGITAL EFFECT ............ 59, 85

Digital program editing

M, N

Main sound ............................ 229

Manual focus ........................... 76

Memory chromakey ............. 148

Memory luminancekey ........ 148

MEMORY MIX ...................... 148

Memory overlap ................... 148

Memory PB ZOOM .............. 173

Memory photo recording .... 135

“Memory Stick” .................... 126

Menu settings ........................ 207

M. FADER ................................ 55

Mirror mode ............................ 32

Moisture condensation ........ 236

MONOTONE .......................... 55

MPEG ..................................... 126

MPEG movie recording ....... 153

NETWORK ............................ 205

NTSC system ......................... 235

.................. 45, 95, 109, 146, 158

T, U, V

Tape counter ............................ 33

Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 86

Tape photo recording ............. 51

Telephoto ................................. 31

Time code ................................. 33

Title ................................. 119, 122

Title search ............................... 89

Touch panel ..................... 24, 129

TRAIL ....................................... 59

Transition ................................. 27

TV color systems ................... 235

USB jack ................................. 183

USB Streaming ...................... 186

Volume ..................................... 39

........................................ 98, 160

Digital zoom ............................ 31

DISPLAY .................................. 41

DOT .......................................... 55

Dual sound track tape .......... 229

EDITSEARCH ......................... 37

END SEARCH ................... 37, 43

Exposure .................................. 74

O, P, Q

OLD MOVIE ............................ 59

Operation indicators ............ 252

OVERLAP ................................ 55

Photo save .............................. 163

Photo scan ................................ 94

Photo search ............................ 92

PICTURE EFFECT ............ 58, 84

Picture search .......................... 43

Playback pause........................ 43

Playing time............................. 18

Power zoom ............................. 31

Print mark .............................. 180

PROGRAM AE....................... 67

F, G, H

W, X, Y, Z

FADER ..................................... 55

Fade in/out.............................. 55

Flash.................................. 48, 139

FLASH MOTION.................... 59

Flexible Spot Meter ................. 75

FOCUS...................................... 76

Format ............................ 126, 212

Frame recording...................... 83

Full charge ............................... 16

Warning indicators ............... 226

White balance .......................... 72

Wide-angle .............................. 31

Wide mode .............................. 53

WIPE ......................................... 55

Write-protect switch ............. 126

Write-protect tab ..................... 23

Zebra pattern ........................... 65

Zero set memory ..................... 88

Zoom ........................................ 31

254

Printed on recycled paper.

Printed using VOC (Volatile Organic

Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.

Sony Corporation Printed in Japan

Vizualogic 2004 User Manual
Star Manufacturing 6136RCBD User Manual
Sony XR C7500RX User Manual
Sony TC KE300 User Manual
Sony SAL30M28 User Manual
Sony EX48C User Manual
Sony DHG HDD250 User Manual
Sony 370PL User Manual
Sanyo VPC GH1GX User Manual
Samsung NV100HD User Manual